Home

Notes

1. 11 3 Why do I Need to Edit the Rule File itid oie eee re utto 11 4 What Specifications are Required in the Rule File All Calibre Runs 11 5 What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre DRC 11 6 ExamplecRule Pile TOs DRG usos iecit sa betta sed ttr dictate 11 7 What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre LVS 11 8 What Specifications are Optional in the Rule File LVS Calibre 11 9 Example Rule Fefor LV Soest screen axe etn tede iau padte E cR Ee 11 10 How to Launch a Calibre DRC Run 4 as detos ieri ter ro Ee pr ERR Prep 11 11 What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre DRC 11 12 How to Launch a Calibre LVS Run sahen ace nope teo otio rtp 11 14 What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS 11 15 Saying the DESHSCEDDU dA cadant todatwisade Mid cuota stehende lesson d pd qute 11 18 Haw to View the Results 5e cotes i o ise ree inan een ee e VE o eke 11 19 Command Line Calibre DRC Example Edit the Rule File 11 20 Command Line Calibre DRC Example Launch Calibre 11 21 Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Transcript suus 11 22 Command Line Calibre DRC Example View Report esses 11 23 Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Results DB 11 24 Command Lin
2. esee 6 9 VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 2 esee 6 10 How to Create Virtual Connections from Calibre Interactive 6 11 What are Soft Connections i een oro Peto oru E e ioo o Ln eb tiva Cu vega 6 12 Soft Connechions Example saersi i NE Rb o ED Dr e be deo Red 6 13 Vea STAMP T Lotus a htt dedi a hho oak hella PA da Seta ato d a dae Dad 6 14 How to Identify Soft Connections with the STAMP Operator 6 15 How to Locate Soft Connections with DRC eese 6 16 What is the SCONNECT Operator riri roe e er en Cocoa 6 17 The SCONNECT Operator Syntax sie ceat ries ect repa taedas ien pub pedi eoru 6 18 x Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont How to Generate Reports from SCONNECT Data eere 6 19 Locating Soft Connections with the SCONNECT Operator 6 21 Lab Informat Oh s uenti ab tet e toe edel EO Ala sangsoo 6 22 Lab C OMNES VID eee ned Febr eite oet tti ep o E ete ear roit 6 23 Exercise 6 1 Finding a Hard Connection Error Not Shorts OF Opens versiasi ibtd ur tds ui sa tctar eiu ib e eb ushered eae 6 24 Exercise 6 2 Use STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors eese 6 27 Exercise 6 3 Use DRC and STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors usse 6 29 Exercise 6 4 Use SCONNECT to Find Soft Connection Errors sss 6 33 Exercise 6 5
3. gt lt With Hcells gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Instances Devices Total Total Instances Instances Total Total of this in this Device Device of this in this Instance Instance Memory Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings FDC 1 x 2 3 TFDC HIC 5 x 6 7 THIC 22 4 88 3T 22 4 88 44 31 4 8 32 Tl 4 8 32 16 10 5 6 30 LI 5 6 30 15 9 5 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 9 4 5 3 2 6 2l 3 2 6 3 05 5 1 280 280 100 0 1 190 190 95 0 0 10 10 100 36 aE 10 10 5 0 0 T 6 6 2l Hi 6 6 3 0 0 140 95 140 95 Devices Cell Name Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts this Cel 280 lab7b level 0 4 a1220 x10 level 1 MN x2 level 2 MP x2 level 2 6 a1230 x5 level 1 MN x3 level 2 x MP x3 level 2 8 a1240 x4 level 1 MN x4 level 2 x MP x4 level 2 2 a1310 x3 level 1 MN x1 level 2 MP x1 level 2 6 a1620 x3 level 1 MN x3 level 2 MP x3 level 2 6 a1720 x1 level 1 MN x3 level 2 x MP x3 level 2 10 a2311 x10 level 1 MN x5 level 2 MP x5 level 2 8 ICV 1 x6 level 1 4 a1220 x2 level 2 MN x2 level 3 MP x2 level 3 OK netlist hcell a1220 s1220 netlist report hierarchy layout Netli Total Total Poten This Cells CALIBRE LVS HCELL ANALYSIS AND HIERARCHY TREE REPORT st file lay net
4. Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist Netlist Extraction Outputs Run Control Layout Netlist HCells we umss Je sl Transcript Run LVS Import layout database from layout viewer Primary Cell labs Layout Netlist lab5 layout net co You will cover the details of this window in future Modules for now you will only deal with texting and that information is contained in the rule file 8 View the rule file Under the Rules tab It should be lab5 rules What layer is the text layer 5 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What layers are connected to the text layer What LAYOUT TEXT exists in the rule file 9 Leave the rule file open 10 Choose Menu Button Run LVS to perform an LVS run At the end of the LVS run Calibre opens the LVS Report and opens RVE What are the results Did it pass LVS Calibre sucesfully matched all the instances and nets The next couple of step will show you how Calibre helped you match all the nets 11 Find the Initial Correspondence section for cell lab5 in the report Based on the LAYOUT TEXT in the rule file what would you expect to find in the Initial Correspondence Report What is in the Report Why are you missing one of the Initial Correspondence points How would you verify this Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 29 June 2004 Module 5 Texting 12 13 14
5. J Multi layer Highlights Alternate view cell Run Cancel 11 Select Calibre DRC 12 Leave the socket as the default number unless the instructor tells you otherwise 13 Check that the cell name is a1220 14 Optional Select Multi layer Highlights If you choose this option each of your Discrepancy highlights will appear on a different layer a different color in the GDS file 15 Choose Run to execute the dialog box Both the Calibre Interactive DRC window and the Choose Runset File dialog box open Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 33 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 16 17 18 19 20 2 34 Enter ab2 runset txt as the runset file path You can use the Browse button to locate the file name in the lab2 directory Choose OK to execute the dialog box The Calibre Interactive DRC window opens with the Inputs menu button selected The Calibre Interactive DRC window will now look like this Calibre Interactive DRC user sallyw calibre using_calbr final_te mud E We will now take a closer look at the rule file Click on the Rules menu button This will display the Rules frame in the Calibre Interactive window File ab2 rules should already be specified in the Calibre DRC rule file field 1f not use the browser to select the file Choose View This will open a text window displaying the lab2 rules file In
6. Why doesn t the lower highlight bar cover the entire metal edge it lies on 11 Follow the procedure outlined above to highlight the minimum metall spacing and minimum poly oxide extension violations 12 Click on the eraser icon in the toolbar to clear all highlights Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 41 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 42 Now that we ve seen an overview of where all of our violations are we ll use RVE s ability to zoom the viewing window to take a closer look at the minimum metall spacing violation Choose Menu Setup gt Options This will open the Setup DRC RVE Options window In the options window choose the Highlight tab Select the Zoom cell view to highlights by option button Enter 0 5 as the zoom factor The options window will now look like this Setup DRC RVE Options EE xl Highlight Layout Text View Misc License Don t change cell view after highlighting Pan cell view to highlights Zoom cell view to highlights by 0 5 W Clear existing highlights before showing new highlights OK Cancel _ Apply Tum On Query Help Choose Apply Choose OK to execute the dialog box Select the minimum metall spacing RuleCheck min spacing metall Choose the H icon Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF The spacing viol
7. 15 16 17 5 30 You are going to open the Source Netlist to see if RESETT exists Return to the LVS RVE window In the left column there are two groups of information Input Files and Output Files Click on Source Netlist to open a copy of the source netlist E Input Files Layout Netlist Extraction Report LVS Report This opens a new window with the source netlist loaded Again we will cover how to use this window s more powerful features in future labs Right now you just need to find if RESETT exists In the Source Netlist window Choose Menu Go gt Search This opens the Text Search dialog box Enter RESETT Choose Find from Top to begin the search Did you find it Try search for just part of the word RESE Did you find anything Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What did you find It appears that you have a typo in the lab5 rules file 18 Correct the error in the rule file 19 Re run LVS What does the Initial Correspondence section for cell lab5 of the report contain now What did you learn in this exercise 20 Close the rule file 21 Close all Calibre windows except DESIGNrev Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 31 June 2004 Module 5 Texting Exercise 5 2 Find a Badly Placed Layout Text Label In this lab you will see the results of a badly place text label You will also learn two ways to fix the problem l 2 5 32
8. 18 In Calibre Interactive change the following LVS Options Shorts data Run short isolation Output shorts by layer Run flat short isolation Isolate shorts in top cell only AND Between all names 19 Run LVS again Selected Unselected Selected lt grayed out gt lt grayed out gt lt grayed out gt You have the same results as the previous run in the LVS Report 20 Close the LVS Report In RVE you will notice that you have a new file available Shorts Database 21 Open the Shorts Database What happens 8 68 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 22 Expand the errors in the DRC RVE window Calibre DRC RVE lab8a_lvs report s horts le View Highlight Setup CelllabS 182 Errors Check SHORT 1 VDD YSS mlab 38 Errors Check SHORT 2 VDD YSS mlab 86 Errors Check SHORT 3 VDD YSS mlab 58 Errors Cell lab8 182 Errors How many shorts do you have Next you will highlight all the components on the first short 23 Click the LMB over the Check SHORTI statement to highlight it 24 Click the RMB to display the popup menu 25 Choose Highlight Cluster Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 69 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens The layout now looks similar to below If we are going to find this error we first need to know a little about the layout VDD is the vertical bus on the right
9. 43 Arrange the two netlist windows so you can see both at the same time 44 In both windows expand the Network and subcircuits to display lab7a by clicking on the in front of Top Network and again for Subckts The windows should look similar to below E Top Network Im Ei Subckts N 7 EP 5 IP FDC 4 EI Subckts X112 6 8 7 21290 T 0 0 D 0 X 4250 a9500 M0 6 4 11 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 5375 a9500 ENDS xi 35 6 qon EST 256206 wel De Do CXc1337 Beier yon ee re rey a EA EHE al720 X2 34 2 2 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 8 a1310 SUBCKT 3162012 34 5 6 El al620 X32 532 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 13125 Bl a1220 N 8 EP 6 IP 0 FDC 6 ENDS 0 1 25e 1 5e 537 S a1230 RE E arzao Ml silaluse06 WoT Se DS SK13 B a2311 SUBCKT 1310 1 2 3 4 a231 M2 4 6 8 1 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 X 21 YAP N 5 EP 4 IP 0 FDC 2 TEED X3 34 2 3 p L 1 750 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 M0 34 11n L i 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 5375 M4 4 5 3 3 p Lal 75e 06 W 2e 05 x 1312 a1220 MI 3422 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 Icy 1 M5 3643 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 2112 21310 ENDS al620 ENDS SUBCKT a122012 34 5 gt gt SUBCKT lab7a N 62 EP 0 IP 419 FDC 280 X8 VSS VDD 51 50 a1310 T 24500 17000 0 0 X9 VSS VDD 9 3 6 a1220 T 24500 229000 0 X10 VSS VDD 8 4 7 a1220 T 24500 355000 0 X11 vss VDD 50 11 9 8 5 a1240 T 64500 11 X17 VSS VDD 52 51 10 91220 T 40500 17000 M4 52 5 VDD VDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x X21 VSS 3
10. Hierarchical Flat or Calibre CB Hierarchical Layout Files lab6b gds Import layout database from layout viewer unselected Primary Cell lab6 Check Area unselected 9 Enter the following Rules data Calibre DRC Rules File lab6 stamp Calibre DRC Run Directory 10 Enter the following Outputs data DRC Results Database File drc stamp results Format ASCII 6 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 11 12 13 14 15 Start RVE after DRC finishes Write DRC Summary Report File Replace File View summary report after DRC finishes View the Transcript Run DRC What are your results selected selected drc stamp summary selected selected This is the source of your soft connection problem In DESIGNrev Zoom to display the entire layout Toolbar Z all In RVE set the highlight Zoom to Don t change the cell view Highlight the error Where is the problem in the layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 6 31 Module 6 Connectivity az i H Bias TEE 7 nus JUI E t i im sea EE Ea i I LE il Q Do NOT fix the error We will use this same layout to find the error using another method in the next exercise 16 Erase all highlights in the layout 17 Return the layout to the full display oo Go directly to the next exercise without closing any windows 6 32 Using C
11. To the right of the Results Viewing Area 1s Error Data Area This area provides the layout coordinates for the discrepancies Useful to manually track the location in the layout Below the Results Viewing Area is the Checktext Window This area displays the information provided from the rule file about the current discrepancy 2 Click on the in the Cell lab1 1 Error in the Results viewing area E BE 1 Error in 1 of 11 Checks Celllabl 1 Error This expands the errors tree to tell you which rule has the discrepancy What is the name of the rule with the discrepancy 3 Click on the for the rule What do you see now 4 Click on the 01 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 39 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What do you see now In the Error Data Area In the Checktext Window This is the type of information you will find for each discrepancy In future labs you will trace the error back to the layout For now you are finished using RVE 5 Close the RVE window Menu File gt Exit 1 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Exercise 1 4 Get Help In this exercise you will learn the basics of where and how to find help on the various Calibre applications you will be using in this class There are basically two types of Help documentation available for Calibre Tool Tips which just gives you a brief description of a particular button or field an
12. 7 32 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How does Hcell File Specify Cell Correspondence How does Hcell File Specify Cell Correspondence Enables correspondence when cell names differ between source and layout All cells must correspond between source and layout for you to take full advantage of LVS H e Ina large design a cell used only a few time may actually more efficient to allow Calibre to flatten the design for those rarely used cells LVS H flattens unmatched cells and promotes them up the hierarchy toward the top level Requires the name of the cell correspondence file on the command line or in the Calibre Interactive field You can use both Hcell and automatch 7 33 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes There are trade offs to make between having an Hcell file entry for a cell and allowing Calibre to flatten the cell Obviously the more times the cell repeats in the design the more advantageous it is to have an Hcell file entry for that cell If a cell is only used once in the design it may not save you either processing time or man hours to have an Hcell entry for that cell Calibre requires some additional overhead to process and record hierarchical data above what would be required for the same amount of fl
13. 8 52 How many Ports in the Layout Source Layout Source How many Nets in the Layout Source Layout Source Which has more nets the source or the layout Therefore you suspect you have a open or short 6 Find the next cell that 1s incorrect What cell is it What is the problem Does it appear to have shorts or opens 7 Close the LVS Report window It is usually easier to try to correct errors in the lower level cells before tackling the errors in the upper level cells Often correcting the errors at the lower level will automatically fix the upper level errors Therefore you will start with the lower level cell Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 8 Use RVE to display the source and layout netlists 9 Display cell a1220 in DESIGNrev 10 Using RVE highlight the discrepancy The discrepancy in the layout ES t Z Z KN 7 i 7277 77 s 27 i dr AA H Source Netlist SUBCKT 3122019645 N 7 EP 5 IP 0 FDC 4 M0 6 4 1 1 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 5375 Y 14000 M1 amp 5 6 1 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 X 13375 Y 1400C M2 4 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 Y 51000 M3 B5 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x 13125 Y 51000 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 8 53 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 11 8 54 Layout Netlist SUBCKT a1220 1934 N 6 EP 4 IP 0 FDC 4 L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 5375 y 14000 L 1 25
14. Component Component Source Direct Mask Tole Trace Type Subtype Prop Name Prop Name Prop Name rance mn instpar w width w 0 NO mp instpar w width w 0 NO me instpar w width w 0 NO md instpar w width w 0 NO mn instpar 1 length in NO mp instpar 1 length ai 0 NO me instpar 1 length 1 NO md instpar 1 length 1 0 NO r instpar r resistance Yr 0 NO c instpar c capacitance c 0 NO d instpar a area a 0 NO d instpar p perimeter p 0 NO kokckckckck ck oko KKK KKK kc kk kk kk INFORMATION AND WARNINGS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Matched Matched Unmatched Unmatched Component Layout Source Layout Source Type Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 3 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples Ports 16 16 0 0 Nets 74 Fa 0 0 Instances 25 25 0 0 NAND2 7 y 0 0 INV 10 10 0 0 AOI 2 1 5 5 0 0 NAND3 11 11 0 0 NOR2 4 4 0 0 NAND4 Total Inst 62 62 0 0 Step Seven Notice that there are no Unmatched objects in the layout or the source This means that in spite of a difference in the numbers of nets Calibre has found a match for every net and instancein the database This doesn t mean its correct obviously since we have an extra net it just means that Calibre thinks it knows how things are supposed to match up o Statistics 204 isolated layout nets were deleted 3 passthrough source nets were deleted 2 layout nets were reduced to passthrough nets 2 source nets wer
15. Deleting TRIVIAL PINS TRIVIAL PINS deleted CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 OK netlist report hierarchy layout CALIBRE LVS HCELL ANALYSIS AND HIERARCHY TREE REPORT Netlist file lay net Total Flat Device Count TFDC 280 count of all devices represented flat Total Hierarchical Instance Count THIC 280 count of all devices expanded to hcells Potential Hcell Analysis This report presents information useful for selecting LVS hcells for a netlist Cells are presented in order of potential memory savings if the cell is used as an hcell Column Definitions Flat The following columns present statistics concerning the flattened design 1 Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated throughout the entire flattened design 2 Devices in this Cell FDC The number of devices in this cell when its entire contents are flattened Flat Device Count 3 Total Device Contrib 1 x 2 The number of devices this cell contributes to the total flat device count 4 Total Device Contrib 3 TFDC 100 Column 3 represented as a percentage of total flat device count With Hcells the following columns present statistics taking into account the current hcells and automatch setting 5 Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated within all existing hcells always 1 for an hcell 6 Instances in this Cell HIC The number of instances that would be in this cell if all non
16. Layout Verification Process Flow for DRC Layout Verification Process Flow for DRC Completed Layout 1 9 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 1 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Layout Verification Process Flow for LVS Layout Verification Process Flow for LVS Completed Completed Source Layout Schematic netlist for the completed source 1 10 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 9 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Mask Manipulation Process Flow Mask Manipulation Process Flow Completed Layout 1 11 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 1 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What are the Various Calibre Tools What are the Various Calibre Tools Covered in this class Not covered in this class Calibre RVE QDB H Calibre xRC xCalibre Calibre LVS and Calibre LVS H Calibre Cell Block Calibre DRC and Calibre DRC H Calibre MDP Calibre Interactive Calibre RET tools Calibre DESIGNrev optionally 1 12 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes QBD H Query Database Hierarchical Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 11 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Useful Abbreviations Useful Abb
17. Make simple layout changes 1 19 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 17 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction How to Invoke Calibre DESIGNrev calibredrv How to Invoke Calibre DESIGNrev calibredrv E RUE CN bre DESIGN TEV A E NE File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Help Z 4 x ZAI Back forth 4x Ruler Select Move Box 1 gY Poly Vertex Notch A bookmarks A layouts lab8b a1220 a1230 731240 al310 a1820 al720 a2311 a9500 i Hierarchy Gu 74 250 0 000 Layout lab8b gds 1 20 Using Calibre Introduction Notes w none best ref poly y edge y Wik y text Layers lt lt lt 89 671 85 000 s Cel a1240 Depth 0 Grid off Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction How to Find Help How to Find Help Calibre Documentation Online help manuals Supportnet White papers Application Notes a Verification a DESIGNrev E a RET a MDP of a xRC a xCalibrate Release Info Configuring and Licensing Guide a MTflex Guide fq 0 Mer vo IS 1 21 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What is the Command
18. Module 10 Additional Topics Exercise 10 3 Run A Layout vs Layout Check You ve just returned from working on another project to discover that a junior layout engineer was given the task of making several minor metal2 changes to your chip layout Now you want to check the new version of the layout to insure that only the specified changes were made This sounds like a perfect application for Calibre s Layout vs Layout LVL capabilities so let s try that 1 Re display the lab10 gds file into DESIGNrev by choosing the Back button in DESIGNrev 2 In the Calibre Interactive DRC window specify file lab10c rules as the rule file 3 Open file lab10c_rules for editing Note that there are places in the rule file that have been reserved for inserting the layout2 specification statements and the XOR rule that will compare layout with layout2 Given that the revised GDS data is in file lab10_rev1 gds the type of that file is GDS and the name of the top level cell in that file is lab10_rev1 what three specification statements need to be added to the rule file for layout2 4 Insert the necessary layout2 specification statements into the rule file One more statement will be required to tell Calibre to add 100 to each layout2 shape layer value the bump value What does this statement look like 10 34 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics 5 Insert the bump statement into the rule
19. The Query Server should respond with a2311 s2311 a1220 s1220 Use the same process steps 6 and 7 above to find the next cell to add to the Hcell list Add that cell to the Hcell list Check what is in the current Hcell list Type netlist report hcells The Query Server should respond with a2311 s2311 a1220 s1220 a1240 s1240 Write the Hcell list to the file my hcells Type response file my hcells netlist report hcells response direct Using another terminal window open my hcells using any text editor to check the results Next you are going to automatically generate a hcell file where each of the hcells in the file will give you a 596 or greater memory savings Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 85 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 7 86 First clear the current Hcell list so you can start fresh Type netlist clear hcells Automatch Hcells by name Type netlist automatch on Also set cell matching by placement count Type netlist placementmatch on By turning on automatch and placementmatch you are creating a i starting point for the automatic Hcell file generation These Note options match the layout and netlist cell names Set the evaluation threshold to 5 Type netlist evaluation threshold 5 Generate the Hcell file Type netlist select hcells Send the results to the Hcell file Type response file thold 5 hcells netlis
20. Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit This appendix contains simple hand drawn schematics to aid in troubleshooting during lab work Using Calibre with DESIGNrev D 1 June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit D 2 Cell a1230 a1230 3 4 5 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit Cell a1240 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 3 gt S A x xha ODD Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit D 4 Cell a1310 s a1310 VDD 2 vi D vob e gt a I vss 1 VSS Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit Cell a1620 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 D 5 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit D 6 Cell a1720 VSS Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit Cell a2311 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix D Schematics for Lab Circuit D 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 NOTES Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Part Number 707235
21. 2 antennas 1 with 2 gates 1 with 4 gates 3 antennas 2 gates each MET1c G6 10 8 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 1 antenna with 6 gates 2 10 7 Module 10 Additional Topics Additional Antenna Considerations Cont Additional Antenna Considerations Cont Asingle rule that looks at all interconnect layers at once can be too simplistic Specific SVRF features address the antenna build up issue e Incremental connectivity specification e Accumulate ratios from multiple NET AREA RATIO statements Consult the SVRF Manual and SupportNet Application Notes for additional information 10 9 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics How Can Calibre Produce Custom Output How Can Calibre Produce Custom Output The following slides present useful output options Creating GDSII output from Calibre Writing all shapes from one layer to a GDSII file Writing all shapes from one net to a GDSII file 10 10 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 9 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Generating GDSII Output from Calibre 10 11 Notes 10 10 Generating GD
22. 5 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What are Initial Correspondence Points What are Initial Correspondence Points Pairs of nets or ports which have identical user given names in the source and the layout Good practice to name the ports of the top level cell and the major nets in the design Information and Warning section of the LVS report lists the Initial Correspondence Points Do not confuse with matching cell names Usethe report to resolve circuit ambiguities between the source and the layout Improves processing performance 5 4 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 3 June 2004 Module 5 Texting Example of Initial Correspondence Points Report Example of Initial Correspondence Points Report ZXEXXZITII OMA EEE AREER EEREEEEEE EERE ERERE EERE EE EEEEEREEEEREREREEEERERERS INFORMATION AND WARNINGS KEEEEKEREREREREREREEEEREEEEEREREEREREREREREREEEEREREEREREREREREEREREREREREEEERSE SPECIFY INITIAL CORRESPONDENCE POINTS LAYOUT TEXT VDD 80 0 3 0 50 top cell LAYOUT TEXT VSS 60 0 10 0 50 top cell LAYOUT TEXT SEL 120 0 260 0 50 top cell e Total Inst o Initial Correspondence Points Nets VDD VSS SEL DO DI D2 D3 Q0 Ql 5 5 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5
23. 9 Enter the following Input Netlist data Netlist Files lab8 source spi Import netlist from schematic viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab8 10 Enter the following Input HCells data Match cells by name automatch Selected Use H Cells list from file Selected filename cell file 11 Enter the following Rules data Calibre LVS Rules File lab8 rules Calibre LVS Run Directory Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 45 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 12 Enter the following Outputs Report SVDB data LVS Report File View Report after LVS finishes Create SVDB Database Start RVE after LVS finishes Generate data for xCalibre Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data SVDB Directory 13 Run LVS What are your results lab8 lvs report Selected Selected Selected Unselected Unselected svdb Looking at the LVS Report what kind of errors do you have 14 Close the LVS Report From RVE what cell has the problem What is the discrepancy Which has more nets the source or the layout 8 46 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Therefore you suspect you have a open or short 15 Display the source and layout netlists 16 Rearrange your windows so you can see RVE the two netlists and DESIGNrev 17 In the DESIGNrev window display the cell with the discrepancy a1220 18 In RVE select Z Set Highligh
24. Calibre Interactive LVS aE LYS Report File eov WE View Report after LVS finishes W Create SVDB Database W Start RYE after LVS finishes Generate data for Calibre xRC Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data SVDB Directory svdb Ss E We do not need to enter any data on the Flat LVS Output tab 7 54 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Do you know why Now that you have all the data entered you are ready to perform an LVS run 36 Choose Run LVS from the Menu button If you get a message box asking to overwrite layout file lab7a gds i cancel the message box and return to the Input Menu Note button Layout tab Make sure Import layout database from layout viewer is unselected then try running LVS again When LVS completes Calibre Interactive LVS should display the Transcript the LVS report should be open in a new window and a LVS RVE window should be open with the results loaded First you will quickly review the transcript 37 Starting at the top skim through the transcript Which part of the LVS operation seemed to take the longest Based on the amount of information in the transcript Is the comparison correct 38 Look at the LVS report You have seen this report several times in previous labs lets test to see how much information you can find from this report What are the initial correspondence points Using Calibre with
25. Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 14 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Gates How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Gates LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 15 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 13 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Shorts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Shorts LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 16 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options ERC How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options ERC LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 17 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 15 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Connect How to Use Cal
26. LVS Calibre Other useful LVS specification statements MASK SVDB DIRECTORY LVS ABORT ON SOFTCHK LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR LVS BOX LVS GROUND NAME LVS POWER NAME LVS ISOLATE SHORTS LVS RECOGNIZE GATES LVS REPORT MAXIMUM LVS SOFTCHK 11 10 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Example Rule File for LVS Example Rule File for LVS Use this Rule File for running LVS checks on the 4 bit adder design LAYOUT SYSTEM gdsii LAYOUT PATH SHOME layout files 4 bit adder gds LAYOUT PRIMARY 4 bit adder SOURCE SYSTEM spice SOURCE PATH SHOME source files 4 bit adder spi SOURCE PRIMARY 4 bit adder LVS REPORT 4 bit adder lvs report MASK SVDB DIRECTORY svdb Include the factory golden rules INCLUDE SHOME master rules factory golden rules 11 11 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre How to Launch a Calibre DRC Run How to Launch a Calibre DRC Run Flat Calibre DRC run calibre drc rule file name Hierarchical Calibre DRC run calibre drc hier rule file name 11 12 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 11 June 2004 Module 11
27. Specify Results Calibre Interactive DRC Database Information Launch RVE after DRC run Define DRC Summary Report Information View Summary Report after DRC run 3 18 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 15 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Run Control How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Run Control As needed e Queue for license e Run 64 bit version e Run multi threaded 3 19 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options DRC Options Calibre Interactive DRC Menu Setup gt DRC Options 3 20 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont DRC Options Output Connect Area DRC Includes 3 21 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont How
28. Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 1 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What are the Various I O Formats What are the Various I O Formats Inputs e Layout Typically GDSIl e Rule Files ASCII e Schematic or Netlist SPICE or Verilog LVS only Outputs e Layout with results flagged e Transcript ASCII e Results databases ASCII and binary 1 16 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Methods for Invoking Calibre Tools Methods for Invoking Calibre Tools Directly from the command line e SMGC HOME bin calibre drc my file e Specify run information on the command line or in the rule file From Calibre Interactive GUI e MGC HOME bin calibre gui Calibre Interactive DRC LVS PEX RVE e Select which Calibre you want to use From within other tools From DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive Scan Layer with RVE Scan Instances with RVE GDS Diff 1 17 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What is Calibre DESIGNrev What is Calibre DESIGNrev Rapid display edit for GDSII layouts Launch Calibre DRC LVS and RVE Calibre Interactive Display results on the layout
29. VSS is the vertical bus on the left VDD connections generally run on the top of cells VSS on the bottom 26 Erase the highlights 27 Display the other two short clusters 8 70 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 28 Look carefully at the layout while erasing the highlight You may have to highlight and erase a few times to see it How often did the short run between the VDD and VSS horizontal busses More than once Does in appear to happen near a consistent cell Do you think the short is in the lab8 cell or one of the lower ones Another hint that the short might be in a lower level cell is that you have three shorts It is possible to create a short but not too likely a layout designer would do it three times 29 Close both RVE windows and the LVS Report We are going to run LVS again this time looking for shorts in the lower level cells 30 In Calibre Interactive change the following LVS Options Shorts data Run short isolation Selected Output shorts by layer Unselected Run flat short isolation Unselected Isolate shorts in all cells Selected AND Selected Between all names Selected 3 Run LVS 32 Display the Shorts Database Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 71 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 33 34 33 8 72 What is different Highlight the Cluster in Short 1 Notice that now only geometries
30. 4 4 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 3 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics DRC Debugging Techniques DRC Debugging Techniques The following tools techniques make DRC debugging easier RuleCheck selection RuleCheck grouping Database window specification Cell exclusion Maximum results reporting 4 5 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Select Rules How to Select Rules From within Calibre Interactive Menu Setup gt Select Checks Select Checks 4 6 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Group Rules How to Group Rules Check just a certain group of rules speed up verification time and minimize results on reports Group rules according to type Very useful in combination with DRC UN SELECT CHECK Create RuleCheck groups inside the rules file using GROUP name rule checkl rule checkN Use the wildcard to match zero or more characters Examples GROUP poly layer rules min poly width poly over metal2 metall over poly GROUP min metal min metal metal3 min includes min metall min meta
31. Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Transcript of Interactively Creating Hcell File The information below is a transcript of interactively creating the Hcell file interactive hcells calibre query Calibre v2004 1 5 29 Wed Apr 7 23 26 06 PDT 2004 Litho Libraries v2004 1 5 28 Tue Apr 6 21 24 25 PDT 2004 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2004 All Rights Reserved THIS WORK CONTAINS TRADE SECRET AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION OR ITS LICENSORS AND IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE TERMS if Mentor Graphics software executing under Sun SPARC Solaris Running on SunOS ding 5 8 Generic 108528 20 sun4u Starting time Fri Apr 16 08 52 16 2004 CALIBRE HDB QUERY SERVER Fri Apr 16 08 52 17 2004 OK Ready to serve netlist read query rules Initializing LVS READING layout Layout READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 0 MALLOC 1 1 1 READING source Source READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 0 MALLOC 1 1 1 Identifying CORRESPONDING cells CORRESPONDING Cells Identified CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Adding GLOBAL elements GLOBAL elements added CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Resolving DEEP SHORTS DEEP SHORTS resolved CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 C 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Resolving HIGH SHORTS HIGH SHORTS resolved CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0
32. Command Line Calibre What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre DRC What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre DRC mergedatabase This switch directs the GDSII reader to merge geometries on a per cell per layer basis as it reads the stream into memory Generally you would use this only for databases created by module generator tools that redundantly place geometries on top of each other writedatabase This switch translates a GDSII layout database into binary polygon format Calibre performs no rule checking in this mode Flat runs only 64 This switch invokes the 64 bit version of Calibre When enough physical memory is available this speeds up runs involving large data bases 11 13 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre DRC Cont What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre DRC Cont nowait This switch instructs the MGLS license queuing features to be disabled This results in Calibre exiting instead of queuing for a license if one is not available turbo no of cpus This switch instructs Calibre DRC H to use multi threaded parallel processing for all stages except Litho operations The no of cpus argument is a positive integ
33. How to Place Text into the Layout secet PEN eterna isses Hge Y DH eis copi pus 5 2 What are Initial Correspondence Points sesssssseeeeneneeees 5 3 Example of Initial Correspondence Points Report esseeeee 5 4 How to Use Text to Establish Initial Correspondence Points 5 5 What Syntax Rules Apply to Text Names sse ener 5 6 When to Use LAY OUT TEXT Placements 2er tere Ir eh EL eps 5 7 When to Use TEXT Placements oscar eo dete eet ie Code ERES i bct 5 8 How to Specify Which Layers are Valid Text Layers eesssesssse 5 9 How to Filter Unwanted Text ODJeetso teet tiet een tener repr nde teas 5 10 How to Attach Text Labels to Target Objects sssssseeeeee 5 11 Example of Explicitly Attached Text cccccccscccsssssssssessseceessecsesseesseecesneeens 5 12 Example of Implicitly Attached Texto ccc cccssccssecssssseseseceessecseeeecesneeenneeens 5 13 Example of Freely Attached Dexter teo EN eret hn it Rest Er rtetodiie iud 5 14 What about Case Sensitivity sc1i lt 5 sol erative cacy cia pis pt tinker sui te dba Se cont 5 15 How to Control Case Sensitivity see ooocs nives esp n nse e DER ESPERE SU VE bn Hu RR eU End 5 16 How to Control Case Sensitivity During LVS sese 5 17 How to Identify Unmatched Text Names essssssessseeeeeeeeen 5 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev ix June 2004 Table of Contents TABL
34. ISD Creation It s More than Just Tools Knowledge Center Knowledge Sourcing Mentor Graphics Support CD Mentor Graphics SupportBulletin Mentor Graphics SupportCenter Mentor Graphics SupportFax Mentor Graphics SupportNet Email Mentor Graphics SupportNet FTP Mentor Graphics SupportNet Telnet Mentor Graphics We Mean Business MTPI Online Knowledge Center OpenDoor Reinstatement 2000 SiteLine2000 SupportNet KnowlegeBase Support Services BaseLine Support Services ClassLine Support Services Latitudes Support Services OpenLine Support Services PrivateLine Support Services SiteLine Support Services TechLine Support Services RemoteLine and VR Process Mentor Graphics trademarks may only be used with express written permission from Mentor Graphics Fair use of Mentor Graphics trademarks in advertising and promotion of Mentor Graphics products requires proper acknowledgement Nutcracker is a registered trademark of MKS Mentor someti mes refers to products by using trademarks Marks owned by a third party and such use is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of that product but is intended to indicate a product from or associated with a respective third party Use of third party Marks is intended to inure to the benefit of the respective thi rd party Rev 040504 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Trademark Information 1 eoo edo eee et nana ev aa ee ai no eoa svo geV keen eu eo qu nee e vae sakh rav Fo
35. June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition TRACE PROPERTY Statement TRACE PROPERTY Statement TRACE PROPERTY component type component subtype Isource property spice value Uayout property spice value tolerancel tolerancel prop tolerance2 tolerance2 prop ABSOLUTE STRING Examples TRACE PROPERTY MP W W 2 Compare width property on PMOS devices with a 2 tolerance TRACE PROPERTY MP W W 2e 6 ABSOLUTE Compare width property on PMOS devices with a tolerance of 2microns 9 15 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Key TRACE PROPERTY Statement Parameters Key TRACE PROPERTY Statement Parameters component type Type of device component_subtype Component subtype If unspecified all devices of the same type will be included source property spice value The Source property to be traced The optional parameter allows you to parse strings to find the desired value layout property spice value The Layout property to be traced The optional parameter allows you to parse strings to find the desired value ABSOLUTE Tolerance parameters are treated as absolute values rather than percentages 9 16 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes There are additional parameters available
36. MN NET Y LAYER PWELL LAYER OXIDE LAYER POLY LAYER NPLUS PAREA OXIDE AND PWELL NGATE POLY AND PAREA NOX OXIDE AND NPLUS NSD NOX NOT NGATE 9 7 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont Device Statement DEVICE MN NGATE POLY NSD NSD PWELL 0 LAYER PWELL a Seed Layer N LAYER OXIDE L Gate POLY LAYER POLY Source NSD LAYER NPLUS Done asp MANN Buk PWEL BENE PAREA OXIDE AND PWELL NGATE POLY AND PAREA NOX OXIDE AND NPLUS NSD NOX NOT NGATE 9 8 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 7 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont ELEMENT MN I i NET Y METALI 44 VIA O CONTACT m Connection statements CONNECT METALI METAL2 by VIA CONNECT METAL NOX by CONTACT 9 9 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont Associating Layout Devices to Source Co
37. Opencircuits e Occur when connectivity is not maintained over the entire length of a layout net e Can lead to a difference between the number of nets layout nets gt source nets NET 1 Nets 1 and 2 are shorted cmd m Intended layout NET 1 Net 2 is open NET 1 NET 2 NET 2 8 3 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens What Causes Shorts and Opens What Causes Shorts and Opens RESET2 is open Misplaced polygons RESET1 RESET2 RESET1 RESET1 F Improper use of VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME or VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME RESET RESET1 and RESET2 are logically connected aic Careless routing in a RESET hierarchical environment 8 4 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Incorrect texting RESET1 Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 3 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens How to Identify Opens Using the LVS Report How to Identify Opens Using the LVS Report Initial Error message warns about different number of nets REPORT FILE NAME CREATION TIME CURRENT DIRECTORY USER NAME CALIBRE VERSION LVS Report File lvs reportopen txt foser sallyw calibre using_calbr labS laySopen net l lab5b src spi lab5b gold
38. Texting How to Use Text to Establish Initial Correspondence Points How to Use Text to Establish Initial Correspondence Points Prerequisites for successful texting of nets and ports Specify which layers are valid text layers Establish connectivity of target object layers Attach the text labels to target objects e Viatext layout objects or SVRF statements e Apply syntax rules to user given text names 5 6 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What Syntax Rules Apply to Text Names What Syntax Rules Apply to Text Names Forlayout databases apply these rules e Name cannot begin with n N or I e Names can only contain one leading character Forauser given name to be valid in SPICE netlists e Name must contain at least one Non numeric character e Name can only contain one leading character 5 7 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting When to Use LAYOUT TEXT Placements When to Use LAYOUT TEXT Placements Places text using rule file statements LAYOUT TEXT Placements e Behave exactly as if the designer placed text with the layout editor e Attach to the cell using cell space coordinates e Obey TEXT LAYER and TEXT DEPTH statements Example LAYER M2 TXT 50 Define the l
39. X Cell a2311 10 Errors Celllab4 Highlight this error by choosing the Highlight icon 4 This opens the a1310 cells and zooms into the error 16 Return to the RVE window and erase the highlight 17 Inthe RVE window unselect Menu Highlight gt Highlight in Context 18 Choose Highlight again 4 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics This displays the error in the context of the top cell lab4 Depending on your editing needs or preferred editing style you can display the results either way to fit your needs 19 If you have time experiment displaying the other errors in various ways 20 When you are ready to go to the next exercise erase all highlights Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 33 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 6 Correcting Errors This is a free form exercise There are 13 errors in the layout Using the skills you learn in this lab and all the previous ones see how many of the errors you can correct in the time remaining Don t forget to change the layout file to a new name and select Import layout database for layout viewer in the Calibre Interactive Inputs window so changes are reflected in the DRC run Good Luck When you are finished with this lab close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC RVE and Summary Report 4 34 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004
40. You may need to view both the netlist and the layout for a1220 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 33 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 255 26 27s 9 34 Close all RVE windows and the netlists In the Calibre Interactive LVS window choose Menu Setup LVS Options This adds the LVS Options Menu button Choose LVS Options Menu button Choose the Supply tab You need to define the Power and Ground net names to aid LVS in recognizing gates Enter VDD in the Power net names text box Enter VSS in the Ground net names text box Choose the Gates tab Select Recognize all gates Run LVS again What are the results Pin swapping is not always permitted but when it is allowed this is the method to resolve the discrepancies Close the LVS RVE window and all netlist windows Close the Calibre Interactive L VS window The DESIGNrev window should still be open Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Exercise 9 2 Property Tracing In this lab you will write rule statements to enable property tracing and view the results 1 In DESIGNrev open lab9 trace gds 2 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 3 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab9 trace 4 Choose to create a new runset 5 Enter the following Inputs Layout data Hierarchical Flat
41. calibre query This launches the Query Server If it started correctly the last line should read OK Ready to serve Since this is a command line tool you may want to maximize the window to make reading the results returned from the Query Server easier 3 Read in the netlists specified in the rule file Type netlist read query rules If the Query Server read the rules properly and found the netlists there should be several lines about Reading the layout and Reading the source and ending with Deleting trivial pins The last line should be OK 4 Generate the hierarchy report for the layout Type netlist report hierarchy layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 83 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts This generates the hierarchy report The information you are looking for is above the Hierarchy Tree so you may need to scroll up in the results iem plis j Cm With Hcells 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Instances Devices Total Total Instances Instances Total Total b Cell Name of this in ae Device Device of this in this Instance Instance Memory leaf cell Gell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings hcell ao 1 x 2 3 TFDC HIC 5 x 6 7 THIC same name same Cleese 10 10 100 36 10 10 100 36 29 a23ll 22 4 88 3l 22 4 8 31 22 al220 4 8 32 11 4 8 32 11 dl al280 5 6 30 11 5 6 30 11 6 9 al230 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 6 4 3 2 al620
42. la 5 Enter these commands in your rule file What is the command to specify the DRC results database filename 6 Enter this command into the rule file using labl1l drc results as the filename What is the command to create the DRC Summary Report 7 Enter this command into the rule file using labll drc summary as the file name 8 Save the rule file Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 29 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre You are almost ready to launch a Calibre DRC run Before you start you need to know which option switches you will need What is the option switch for a DRC run What is the option switch for a hierarchical run What is the command to launch a hierarchical Calibre DRC run using labll rules as the rule file 9 Use the above command to launch a Calibre DRC run The Transcript displays in the window where you launched Calibre From the transcript do you have any results 10 Use any ASCII text editor to open the Summary Report labll drc summary The Summary Report contains basically the same information as the transcript just in a slightly more readable form What rules have errors How many occurrences of each error 11 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre 11 Close the DRC Summary Report 12 Open the DRC Results Database file labl11 drc results using a text editor Can you find the location of each error min poly width mi
43. 2 Erase any of the current highlights 3 Choose Query Layout Nets from the toolbar HN This opens the Query Layout Nets in lab7a dialog box 4 Choose Browse 7 62 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts This opens the Browse Nets dialog box We are going to start at the top of the hierarchy and work our way down 5 Click on lab7a in the Hierarchy in lab7a area Lab7a should now be surrounded by a blue selection box and all the nets in the cell are listed in the Nets in selected cell box 6 Select net 27 The Browse Nets dialog box should look similar to below Browse Nets 7 Choose OK to execute the dialog box This returns you to the Query Layout Nets in lab7a dialog box with net 27 loaded as the layout net 8 Choose Net Info Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 63 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts This opens the Net 27 in lab7a dialog box From this dialog box you can find all kinds of information about the net Net 27 in lab7a 9 Using the Net 27 in lab7a dialog box answer the following questions What layers are a part of net 27 What instances connect to net 27 7 64 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Net 27 in lab7a Can you highlight the instances directly from the Net 27 in lab7a dialog box You may notice that you have two options for highlighting from the Net 27 in lab7a dialog box If you click on
44. 22 Use the SVRF Manual to list all the available built in devices Calibre s built in devices are Now that you understand what a device is you can query a device 23 From the RVE toolbar choose Query Layout Device np This opens the Query Layout Devices in lab7a dialog box 7 70 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 24 Choose Browse This opens the Browse Devices dialog box 25 Click on the plus in front of lab7a to expand down the hierarchy 26 Select X27 a2311 It will have a blue box surrounding it when selected This fills all the information about the devices in the cell 42311 27 Select M3 Browse Devices M3 mn 2K mem Tum on auery ep 28 Choose OK to execute the Browse Devices dialog box Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 71 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts This returns you to the Query Layout Devices in lab7a dialog box with X27 M3 entered in the Layout Device text box Query Layout Devices in lab7a X271M3 29 Choose Device Info 30 Answer the following questions about X27 M3 What is the seed layer 7 72 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What pins does the device have and what are the connections Why does the net connected to the drain d include instance information when the other pins connections do not What properties does the device have What is correspon
45. 269 373 625 68 000 272 381 625 68 000 unmatched net N 201 unmatched net N 203 unmatched net N 98 A 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples unmatched net unmatched net unmatched net NAND2 NANDA NAND4 NAND2 NAND2 NAND2 NAND2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Transistors ND 18 MN2 ND 18 MN1 ND 18 MP2 ND 18 MP1 Transistors ND 158 MN4 ND 158 MN3 ND 158 MN2 ND 158 MN1 ND 158 MP4 ND 158 MP3 ND 158 MP2 ND 158 MP1 Transistors ND 151 MN4 ND 151 MN3 ND 151 MN2 ND 151 MN1 ND 151 MP4 ND 151 MP3 ND 151 MP2 ND 151 MP1 Transistors ND 31 MN2 ND 31 MN1 ND 31 MP2 ND 31 MP1 Transistors ND 32 MN2 ND 32 MN1 ND 32 MP2 ND 32 MP1 Transistors ND 102 MN2 ND 102 MN1 ND 102 MP2 ND 102 MP1 Transistors ND 103 MN2 ND 103 MN1 ND 103 MP2 ND 103 MP1 Kk kk Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk unmatched gate unmatched gate unmatched gate unmatched gate unmatched gate unmatched gate unmatched gate A 15 Appendix A LVS Report Examples eS eee eS eee eee eee ee eee ee ene ee eee eee eee unmatched gate Transistors ND 152 MN4 ND 152 MN3 ND 152 MN2 ND 152 MN1 ND 152 MP4 ND 152 MP3 ND 152 MP2 ND 152 MP1 nA be See e be Sees ee eee Shee AL unmatched gate Transistors ND 180 M
46. 354 500 273 000 318 354 500 109 500 317 354 500 0 159 316 346 500 442 000 315 346 500 205 000 314 346 500 61 000 313 338 500 387 000 312 338 500 338 000 311 338 500 61 000 310 338 500 11 000 309 330 500 447 500 308 330 500 327 000 307 330 500 273 000 306 330 500 223 000 305 330 375 104 000 o Initial Correspondence Points Ports VDD VSS B 3 A 3 A 2 B 2 A 1 B 1 A 0 B 0 CO C4 S 3 S 2 S 1 S 0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SUMMARY kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Total CPU Time 3 51 Total Elapsed Time 3 18274 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 19 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples A 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix B Web Links of Interest Mentor Graphics Web Sites There are a few websites of interest you will want to visit www mentor com supportnet This is the customer support home page You will have to register and receive a password to access it Just fill out a registration form online and your login information will be sent to you www mentor com calibre index html Download the latest executables See what s new in Calibre Monthly releases Application notes and other documentation Password registry required www mentor com supportnet appnotes html This is a listing of application notes that you can download from the web www mentor com supportnet dsm This is the deep
47. 36 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Zoom Factor Default is 0 7 This means that the highlight will fill 0 7 of the display area 1 0 would cause the highlight error to completely fill the display Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 33 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to View the Discrepancies by RuleCheck How to View the Discrepancies by RuleCheck Menu View By Check Calibre DRC RVE drc results 3 37 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 34 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Flag the Status of Discrepancies How to Flag the Status of Discrepancies Calibre DRC RVE dre results 3 38 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 35 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Use RVE to Locate Discrepancies in the Layout How to Use RVE to Locate Discrepancies in the Layout Setthe desired Highlight Zoom za O A No view change A Pan to highlights 4 Zoom to highlights Gear existing highlights Select the error to display E 2 Errors n3 of 11 Checks LS BI centan2 3 Errors Check min poly width 1 Error Check min spacing metal2 1 Error 01 Check min ext oxide poly 1 Error 01 Choose H cd eee Higt ight Current Error 3 39 Using Calibre Basi
48. 442 000 317 346 500 205 000 316 346 500 61 000 315 338 500 387 000 314 338 500 338 000 313 338 500 61 000 312 338 500 11 000 311 330 500 447 500 310 330 500 327 000 309 330 500 273 000 308 330 500 223 000 307 330 375 104 000 o Initial Correspondence Points Ports VDD VSS B 3 A 3 A 2 B 2 A 1 B 1 A 0 B 0 CO C4 S 3 S 2 S 1 S 0 Kock ecce e coke kc ke ck e ke ck ecce KK KKK KK RK KKK RK KKK RK KKK KK KKK KKK RK AK KKK AKA kk k kk kk DETAILED INSTANCE CONNECTIONS LAYOUT NAME ne SOURCE NAME kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk This section contains detailed information about connections of matched instances that are involved in net discrepancies NAND2 NAND2 input N 63 311 375 68 000 input N 63 input 76 351 375 406 000 input N 7 output N 10 327 375 68 000 N 9 N 9 375 375 68 000 output N 10 Transistors 111 325 875 31 000 ND 19 MN2 114 333 875 31 000 ND 19 MN1 251 325 625 68 000 ND 19 MP2 254 333 625 68 000 ND 19 MP1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk UNMATCHED OBJECTS LAYOUT SOURCE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk N 207 175 375 280 000 unmatched net N 82 363 375 280 000 unmatched net N 205 249 875 280 000 unmatched net N 203 339 375 280 000 unmatched net N 201 301 875 280 000 unmatched net N 98 393 875 280 000 unmatched
49. 50 o Numeric Trace Properties Component Component Source Direct Mask Tole Trace Type Subtype Prop Name Prop Name Prop Name rance mn instpar w width w 0 NO mp instpar w width w 0 NO me instpar w width w 0 NO md instpar w width w 0 NO mn instpar 1 length 1 0 NO mp instpar 1 length 1 0 NO me instpar 1 length 1 0 NO md instpar 1 length 1 0 NO E instpar r resistance 0 NO a instpar c capacitance c 0 NO d instpar a area a 0 NO d instpar p perimeter p 0 NO kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkk INFORMATION AND WARNINGS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Matched Matched Unmatched Unmatched Component Layout Source Layout Source Type Ports 16 16 0 0 Nets 41 41 33 32 Instances 0 0 19 0 mn 0 0 9 0 mp 20 20 5 5 NAND2 6 6 0 2 INV 4 4 0 6 AOI 2 1 5 5 0 0 NAND3 5 5 0 6 NOR2 0 0 2 4 NAND4 0 0 6 0 SPUP 2 1 0 0 6 0 SUP2 0 0 2 0 SMN4 0 0 6 0 SMN2 Total Inst 40 40 55 22 Step Seven Apparently only about half of the circuit was able to compare properly These errors look fairly serious as if there are numerous big problems However before getting too concerned its important to realize that Calibre couldn t even recognize the same numbers of logic gates in the source A 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples and layout We still don t have any clue what the real problem is
50. 875 132 000 missing gate 95 SMN2 Transistors 66 205 875 132 000 68 213 875 132 000 missing gate 96 SMN2 Transistors 84 253 875 132 000 87 261 875 132 000 missing gate 97 SMN2 Transistors 103 301 875 132 000 107 309 875 132 000 missing gate 98 SMN2 Transistors 119 349 875 132 000 122 357 875 132 000 missing gate 99 missing gate AOI 2 1 Transistors XR 121 MPA XR 121 MPC XR 121 MPB XR 121 MNA XR 121 MNC XR 121 MNB 100 missing gate INV Transistors IV 201 MP1 IV 201 MN1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LVS PARAMETERS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk o LVS Setup Component Type Properties Subtype Property Pin Name Properties Power Net Names Ground Net Names Ignore Ports Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 phy comp element comp model phy pin VDD VSS NO A 11 Appendix A LVS Report Examples All Capacitor Pins Swappable NO Reduce Parallel Mos Transistors YES Recognize Gates YES Recognize Only Simple Gates NO Reduce Split Gates YES Reduce Parallel Bipolar Transistors YES Reduce Series Capacitors YES Reduce Parallel Capacitors YES Reduce Series Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Diodes YES Filter Unused Mos Transistors NO Filter Unused Bipolar Transistors NO Report List Limit
51. Button Select Hierarchical or Flat M Select z Calibre Interactive LVS comparison type ro mE UICE Load the layout file EAUU E Define the cell name Define the s 3 Import layout database from layout viewer filename for ee i i a the layout s uosis E n etl i st Layout Netlist llab5a lay net we 7 9 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Netlist How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Netlist Choose the Netlist tab Calibre Inter ctive LVS user sallyw training using calbr v work Enterthe c source netlist a Nerarchical vaat file Select netlist L2 ut he Files a ei working lab5Sa source spi FE View J format Netlist Format SPICE Verilog E n t e r th e 1 Import netlist from schematic viewer primary cell Primary Cell labs gl f J zj 7 10 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 7 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Define the Output Files How to Use Calibre LVS Define the Output Files Choose Output button Enter a
52. Check the Results Exercise 3 3 Correct Errors in the Layout Exercise 3 4 Run Calibre DRC on the New Layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 41 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Exercise 3 1 Setup and Run Calibre DRC In this exercise you will set up a DRC run without help from a runset 3 42 l 2 Make sure you are still logged in to the workstation Open a UNIX shell and change your directory to the location of the lab 3 training files as follows cd HOME using calbr lab3 List the contents of the lab3 directory You should see at a minimum these the three files e lab3 gds e golden rules e layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor Launch DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv Now you will load the GSDII file Choose Menu File gt Open Layout Select lab3 gds by double clicking Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties Launch Calibre Interactive DRC on cell lab3 a Choose Menu Tools gt Calibre Interactive b Select Calibre DRC Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC c Check that lab3 1s entered in the Cell text box d Choose Run to execute the dialog box This launches Calibre Interactive DRC displaying the Choose Runset dialog box In the previous two labs you used a runset to load all the r
53. Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 27 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What Other Types of Rules are There What Other Types of Rules are There Specification LAYOUT SYSTEM LAYOUT PATH LAYOUT PRIMARY Connectivity STAMP CONNECT SCONNECT TEXTING Hierarchical FLATTEN CELL INSIDE CELL Control INCLUDE Conditional Rules Grouping Rules 2 30 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will See how various Calibre DRC rules operate e Width e Internal e External e Enclosure Learn how to use Calibre RVE and DESIGNrev Learn how to highlight errors in DESIGNrev Learn how to use conditional rules 2 mm 2 31 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 29 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Lab Calibre Rules 101 Introduction In this lab you will take a closer look at the rules in a rule file view the results generated and even write some rules of your own Imagine you have been assigned the task to verify the layout of the al220 NAND cell used in the lab1 chip Your starting point is the GDS file containing the layout data for the cell and a go
54. DESIGNrev 7 55 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What are the total number of instances in both the source and layout inside cell lab7a What are the total number of nets inside lab7a Since this is a correct report it is not terribly interesting 39 Close the LVS Report window 7 56 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 40 Make the LVS RVE window active Calibre LYS RYE svdb lab7a Hle View Layout Source Setup Help E E Lys Results Designs Match Rules File B 21220 a1220 Source Netlist EZ 21230 7 a1230 E Output Files a1240 a1240 Layout Netlist E 21310 7 a1310 D Extraction Report EZ a1620 a1620 LVS Report E a2311 a2311 lab7a lab7a Is M Discrepancy Information File Browser Notice all the cells are displayed and they all have happy faces The LVS RVE window has one additional frame that the DRC version does not have the File Browser The File Browser allows you to view the netlists and reports quickly You have already seen some of this functionality in other labs we will now spend time on the netlists so you can get a deeper understanding Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 57 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 4 Click on the Source Netlist in the File Browser This opens the source netlist in a new window 42 Click on the Layout Netlist in the LVS RVE File browser This opens the layout netlist in a new window
55. Edit the rule file by un commenting out the RESET text statement Save the rule file Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 37 June 2004 Module 5 Texting 49 50 5 38 Run LVS Is the problem still fixed You have proven that you can enter text either directly in the layout or through a rule file statement and the behavior results will be the same Close all Calibre windows except DESIGNrev Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting Exercise 5 3 Find Non functional Text Annotations Often layout designers will add text to a layout as an aid to help them keep track 99 6c of their progress Text similar to done incomplete check or future would not be out of the realm of possibilities These labels certainly do not add functionality to the cell and may cause problems when you get to the LVS checking stage as you will soon find out In this exercise you will track down and remove non functional text from the layout l 2 Make DESIGNrev active Load lab5d gds Load the layer properties layer props txt Launch Calibre Interactive LVS Load lab5d runset as the runset Choose Run LVS What kind of results did you get Click on Extraction Report from the Output Tree in the RVE window Again you haven t really learned exactly what an Extraction Report is just yet but you can get a hint of its use What do you think after reading the Extr
56. Flat Device Count TFDC 280 count of all devices represented flat Hierarchical Instance Count THIC 138 count of all devices expanded to hcells tial Hcell Analysis report presents information useful for selecting LVS hcells for a netlist are presented in order of potential memory savings if the cell is used as an hcell Column Definitions Flat 1 C 8 The following columns present statistics concerning the flattened design Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated throughout the entire flattened design Devices in this Cell FDC The number of devices in this cell when its entire contents are flattened Flat Device Count Total Device Contrib 1 x 2 The number of devices this cell contributes to the total flat device count o Total Device Contrib 3 TFDC 100 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts With Hcells the following columns present statistics taking into account the current hcells and Column 3 represented as a percentage of total flat device count automatch setting 5 Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated within all existing hcells always 1 for an hcell 6 Instances in this Cell HIC The number of instances that would be in this cell if all non hcells inside it were expanded Hierarchical Instance Count 7 Total Instance Contrib 5 x 6 The number of instances this cell c
57. Line Format What is the Command Line Format You can run all Calibre operations directly from the command line Example calibre drc my drc rules file e calibre Ivs my lvs rules file Rule files contain more setup information than when using Calibre Interactive Covered in the last Module 1 22 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 1 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Invoke DESIGNrev Launch Calibre Interactive Review the DRC LVS and RVE interactive windows Runa completely setup DRC run Use the Help to find information Display the DRC results a A 1 23 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 21 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Lab Introduction to Calibre Introduction In this lab you will learn how to invoke DESIGNrev and launch the various Calibre Interactive tools from DESIGNrev You will run pre set LVS and DRC learning how to view a discrepancy using Calibre RVE You will also explore how to obtain help for the various Calibre tools Finally you will be encouraged to experiment with polygon creation in DESIGNrev to enable you to edit layout designs in future labs Several concepts and procedures have not yet been thoroughly explained in the lect
58. M2 M3 Drain Source Drain the short M1 M2 and M3 are highlighted in the illustration If you look carefully you will notice there is a small piece of metall below M3 that is shorting the M3 drain to its source That must be your short Shorts are never as easy to find as opens and do require more detective work and some educated guessing 13 Correct the error in the layout by removing the shorting piece of metall 14 Return to the Calibre Interactive LVS window 15 Change the name of the layout input file to lab8b fixed Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 57 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 16 17 18 8 58 The text will turn red as well as the Layout tab and Input menu button Select the Import layout database from layout viewer option This will turn the Layout tab and Input menu button green again Run LVS What happened to all the errors in the lab8 cell When you are ready to go to the next exercise close all Calibre windows except the Calibre Interactive LVS and DESIGNrev windows Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Exercise 8 3 Troubleshooting a Circuit with both Shorts and Opens Troubleshooting a layout that has both kinds of errors adds an additional level of complexity to the task 1 Open layout lab8c gds in DESIGNrev 2 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properti
59. Make DESIGNrev active Open the layout for this exercise lab5b gds Load the layer properties layer props txt Launch Calibre Interactive LVS load lab5b runset as the runset This prepares you for the next LVS run Choose Run LVS What are the results Using information you can find in RVE you may need to expand trees or open windows answer the following questions What cell s have the discrepancies What kind of discrepancy What are the names of the two layout nets with the problem Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting 8 Open the Source Netlist 9 Open the Layout Netlist 10 Close the LVS Report 11 Adjust all your windows so you can see the DESIGNrev RVE Source Netlist and Layout Netlist Calibre LVS RVE svdb lab5 File View Layout Source Setup Help Bi i z c R UN Dr pe ON Di x Layout Netlist user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab9 lab5b_layout Ble Select view Go windows t gt wA Location 4 E Top Network b f d al ih E s at x A x 5375 7 aan tf an ENDS at 9 i e E i x as 324 3 wo vn ie 06 Wa2e i X3 wp 54 VID e 06 Voie ENDS 5 ELI Nell EP L x H W l Se 0S 53 5375 s 1400 ka EI WX 13 088 7 021 9 12 Setthe RVE Zoom settings to 0 4 and unselect the clea
60. Module 1 Introduction 1 56 15 Making a new vertex a Choose the Select icon b Select the polygon c Choose the Vertex icon from the Toolbar Menu d Click on the desired segment This highlights a segment of the polygon e Double click in the location for the new vertex 16 Change a shape by moving a segment edge of a polygon a Unselect everything Type u b Set the Select Mode Options so only Edge is selected c Select the Move icon from the Toolbar Menu d Click the LMB on the desired edge The edge will highlight e Hold down the LMB Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction f Drag the segment to the new location g Release the mouse button h Type u to unselect the edge 17 Notching in an existing shape a Choose the Select icon b Set the select mode to poly c Select the polygon d Choose the Notch icon from the Toolbar Menu e Hold down the mouse button and draw a rectangle from RIGHT TO LEFT Notch In Right to Left Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 57 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction f Release the mouse button g Unselect everything 18 Notching out an existing shape a Select the polygon b Choose the Notch icon from the Toolbar Menu Should already be selected from the previous step c Hold down the mouse button and draw a rectangle from LEFT TO RIGHT Notch Out Left to Right d Release the mous
61. Module 12 Final Exam This is your final exam for the Using Calibre course The Layout Designer has just been fired You will soon find out why Your manager is very concerned about the quality on the work from this particular Layout Designer and would like this design thoroughly check out before it goes to tape All the files you need are in the lab final directory Hints e Thetop cell name in both the layout and the source is lab final e There are four LVS discrepancies You may see up to seven if you perform DRC corrections first e There are 12 DRC discrepancies running flat e Use the power of hierarchy Hcells e Keep track ofthe errors so the instructor can help you if needed e Go for the low hanging fruit first by checking the Extraction Report Good Luck Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 12 1 June 2004 Module 12 Final Exam 12 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples Report 1 Step One Notice that there are no connectivity extraction or netlist compilation errors HEE HEHEH E RHE HUE HBHBHEEBHBHHUEHBBHHHEHBBBHHEHBHBBHBBHE HH CALIBRE HH HH LVS REPORT HHTHHTHHTHHPHHHEHHEH HEH HHH HHH HEHE HHP HEHE HH REPORT FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs rep LAYOUT NAME LVS ONLINE layout M foo 1 SOURCE NAME LVS ONLINE logic ictraceM default LVS MODE Mask RULE FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs online layout master rules CREATION TIME Thu Jul 6 08 2
62. Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 10 2 40 designs we would take advantage of RVE s ability to zoom a viewing window around each violation as it is displayed If you would prefer to only see rulecheck that have errors rather than all rulechecks that were run you can choose Menu View gt Note Error Checks Only Choose Toolbar Z gt No view change Choose Toolbar Z gt Clear existing highlights in the RVE window ht Setup Z r of 10 Clu No view change A Pan to highlights 1 poly wi es in metal A Zoom to highlights basi E c isting highlights gar exisung nini 1 contaci ggg Now we are ready to cross probe the results into the layout viewer In preparation for this step grab the RVE window by its title bar and position the window to the right of the cell layout display in the layout edit window so that you have a clear view of all cell geometries Click on the min metall width RuleCheck The text will turn blue to indicate that this rule has been selected You ll also see a description of this rule appear in the Checktext frame at the bottom of the RVE window Choose Toolbar H to highlight the minimum metall width violation in the layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Two highlight bars will appear in the layout documenting the location of the violation N A W eZ 17 HZA I j j d j 1 P
63. Module 5 Texting Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Use text to provide initial correspondence points for LVS e Identify and correct the following texting problems o Netor port names that are difference from the source o Identically named objects with different connectivity o Text annotations in lower level cells that are not present in the source o Multiple names on the same layout net o Text placed in the wrong location in the layout o Text placed in the wrong layer in the layout e Describe a port and its use Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 1 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Place Text into the Layout How to Place Text into the Layout Place free standing text directly with the layout editor Layer 50 Text YSS w Use Location gt X Y dbu 00 Place Place Manually W Repeat Cancel Place text objects indirectly using Rule file statements LAYOUT TEXT name location layer cell name e TEXT name location layer The TEXT statement always places text in the top cell 5 3 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes LAYOUT TEXT creates objects in both the intermediate GDSII and in the Calibre database Good for generation of new GDSII data TEXT just adds the information to the Calibre Database You may need to add text using Calibre rules rather than directly to the layout because the layout needs to stay clean
64. Perform a LVL comparison on two versions of a Layout e sad mmm J 10 18 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 17 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Lab Additional Topics Introduction This lab will take you through three unique scenarios each representing situations often encountered in chip verification The first exercise will give you the opportunity to enhance an antenna rule to more clearly see the bad antennas The second exercise will guide you through the process of creating a GDS plot file using Calibre SVRF capabilities Finally the third exercise will demonstrate how you can use Calibre s Layout vs Layout feature to display layout differences found when comparing two versions of the layout List of Exercises Exercise 10 1 Improving Antenna Rules Exercise 10 2 Create A GDSII Plot File Exercise 10 3 Run A Layout vs Layout Check 10 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Exercise 10 1 Improving Antenna Rules You ve just been asked to check a design for antenna problems Since you haven t done this before your manager has given you a rule file that was left behind by your predecessor You ve been assured that this rule file will find bad antennas Let s take a look 1 From a UNIX shell change your directory to lab10 cd SHOME using calbr lab10 2 List the co
65. Select the Report tab Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 14 Select LVS Report Option S Calibre Interactive LVS EE File Transcript Setup Help Rues Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes Inputs Outputs LVS Report Options s Run Control A LVS Options Max discrepancies pri B v All Count 50 Transcript a Create Seed Promo _ FE Run vs Max polygons per F in report 50 ra Start RVE TH Mi MHN JE rR ms r vw Select All Clear All 15 Run LVS again What are the results Yes everything still appears to check out correct But you have one additional resource the Softchk Database Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 35 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 16 Click on the Softchk Database E Input Files Rules File Source Netlist 7 Output Files Layout Netlist D Extraction Report LYS Report D Softchk Database This opens another RVE window this time for DRC What results are displayed in the DRC RVE window What is the error 17 Highlight the error in the layout Is it the same error Now you know two methods to find soft connections This completes this exercise 18 Close the rule file 19 Close all Calibre windows except DESIGNrev 6 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Exerc
66. System Modeling Blocks Systems on Board Initiative SystemVision Target Manager Tau TeamPCB TeraCell TeraPlace TeraPlace GF TechNotes TestKompress Test Station Test Structure Builder The Ultimate Site For HDL Simulation The Ultimate Tool For HDL Simulation TimeCloser Timing Builder TNX ToolBuilder Transcable TransDesign Truetiming Utopia Vlog V Ex press V Net VHDL net VHDL write Verinex ViewBase ViewDraw ViewCreator ViewLogic ViewSim ViewWare Viking Virtual Library VirtuaLogic Virtual Target Virtual Test Manager TOP Virtual Wires Voy ager VRTX VRTXmc VRTXoc VRTXsa VRTX32 VStation VStation 30M Waveform DataPort We Make TMN Easy Wiz o matic Work Xpert xCalibre xCalibrate Xconfig XlibCreator XML2AXEL Xpert Xpert API XperBuilder Xpert Dialogs Xpert Profiler XRAY XRAY MasterWorks XSH 9 Xtrace Xtrace Daemon Xtrace Protocol Xtreme Design Client Xtreme Design Session XtremePCB XTK Zeelan Zero Tolerance Verification and ZLibs are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation or its affiliated companies in the United States and other countries The following are service marks of Mentor Graphics Corporation A World of Learning ADAPT AppNotes Assess2000 BIST Compiler BIST In Place BIST Ready Concurrent Board Process DirectConnect ECO Immunity EDGE Engineering Design Guide for Excellence Expert2000 FastTrack Consulting IntraStep
67. Text in the Layout Incorrectly placed text may cause one of these results e LVS Generates a warning if two or more different names are found on a single net Calibre LVS chooses a power ground name if found otherwise it will choose the first name alphabetically and discard any other names it finds e LVS generates a warning if you attempt to assign the same name to two or more nets Calibre LVS arbitrarily chooses one net and leaves the other net unnamed e LVS generates a discrepancy if the misplaced text name matches a valid source net name Toresolve these errors check the following e Text location layer and cell parameters e Text label attachments rules priority LABEL ORDER etc 5 21 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Identify when LVS does not Recognize Text How to Identify when LVS does not Recognize Text Text not found in the layout may cause one of these results e Features dependent on power ground names will not work Short circuit isolation on the power ground nets Logic gate recognition LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR specification Good idea to use this feature to avoid billions and billions of errors e Lose all benefits of initial correspondence points Circuit ambiguity resolution is lost Improved run time execution is lost Toresolve these issues check the follow
68. VE 8 37 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Run LVS with Short Isolation Run LVS with Short Isolation RunLVS again New OutputFile in RVE Shorts Database Calibre LVS RVE svdb lab5a File View Layout Source Setup i e bz ce Sr N D ot p PN Fb Fa F El Input Files p 3 I LYS Results Designs Don t Match X tab5a labSa 1 Discrepancy Incorrect Nets r Click on the Shorts Database to launch DRC RVE 8 38 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 8 37 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Isolate Shorts Using DRC RVE Isolate Shorts Using DRC RVE Each error is a polygon Set Z for no view change Highlighting the error steps through the short Calibre DRC RVE lab5_power lvs report s horts 8 39 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Isolating the Short in the Layout AIll Segments Highlighted Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 39 June 2 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Segment Causing the S
69. and Opens The Layout netlist X122 X125 X131 X132 x140 X141 X147 X151 X156 Z161 1A7 VSS SS SS VSS SS VSS VSS SS VSS SS Yas VDD 13 VDD VDD 25 21 VDD VDD 21 VDD 16 VDD 13 24 VDD VDD 25 VDD 16 wnn 1 59 31220 T 280500 17000 1 180 22 a1230 T 295000 229000 1 40 a1220 T 280500 17000 0 0 x 41 42 a1620 T 280500 355000 0 12 16 a1230 T 295000 229000 0 C 21 a2311 T 296500 118000 0 0 2 al310 T 304500 17000 0 0 X 30C 41 a1720 T 312500 355000 0 0 x 45 a1220 T 320500 17000 0 0 X 30 12 14 ICV 1 T 352500 229C AT a 211 8T 9445NN 118nnn n n Ss z 1 C 11 Identify each of the instances Write the name next to the arrow in the illustration below Give both the layout and source names 5 n A LI Did anything interesting happen while you were looking for instance names Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 8 61 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 12 Look at the subcircuits for Layout X161 and Source X164 13 14 8 62 Are they the same type This could be a big clue to what is happening in the layout X161 is part of discrepancy 1 You can use this piece of information Erase all highlights Highlight Net 60 from discrepancy 1 Where does it connect in the source Where does it connect in the layout You have a short or open The next task will be to identify where this net should connect It may be helpful to
70. and an understanding of Spice netlists e Knowledge of verification concepts and techniques is not required but is helpful Using Calibre with DESIGNrev xix June 2004 About This Training Workbook DESIGNrev as a Background Process DESIGNrev is the layout viewing editing tool of choice for this class To guarantee smooth operation never launch DESIGNrev as a background process or even type in the invoking shell window Slide Numbers in the Workbook Not all slides are published in all workbooks It may appear from the slide numbers that some slides have been skipped They have not Every slide the Instructor will show as part of the class except for the Title and Objective slides are re printed in this workbook for you convenience Custom Class Lab Numbering If you are taking a Custom Class the numbering of the Labs may not directly correspond to the lab number itself For example you may be working on Lab 2 but you will find the data in a directory called lab3 Please take care to follow the Lab instructions for which directory you will find the data for a given Lab Xx Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Objectives Upon completion of this module you will be able to e Explain how Calibre fits into an IC design flow e Select which Calibre tool to use for which job e Name the Calibre inputs and outputs for DRC and LVS checks e Perform simple tasks using Calibre Interactive Use
71. but a good plan would be to go back and rerun the LVS with the Recognize Logic Gates switch turned off Calibre will then try to match individual transistors without assembling them into logic gates In this case you would see that the problem was really quite simple another open circuit and that the logic gate recognition feature ended up confusing Calibre rather that assisting it o Statistics 204 isolated layout nets were deleted 3 passthrough source nets were deleted 1 layout net was reduced to a passthrough net 2 source nets were reduced to passthrough nets o Isolated Layout Nets Layout nets which are not connected to any instances or ports 356 455 000 329 000 355 442 000 431 000 354 442 000 305 000 353 442 000 194 000 352 442 000 93 000 351 441 000 5 500 350 435 000 431 000 349 435 000 305 000 348 435 000 194 000 347 435 000 93 000 346 425 000 321 500 345 417 000 349 000 344 409 000 273 000 343 409 000 205 000 342 402 500 150 000 341 402 500 104 000 340 401 000 223 000 339 394 500 111 000 338 393 000 316 000 337 386 500 61 000 336 386 500 0 159 335 385 000 321 500 334 385 000 273 000 333 378 500 447 500 332 378 500 329 000 331 378 500 205 000 330 378 500 104 000 329 370 500 316 000 328 370 500 5 500 327 369 000 329 000 326 362 500 343 500 325 362 500 217 500 324 362 500 11 000 323 354 500 329 000 322 354 500 321 500 321 354 500 273 000 320 354 500 109 500 319 354 500 0 159 318 346 500
72. consistent throughout the gate me Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes Inputs Outputs Recognize all gates Tu x Recognize simple gates Run Control x Tum gate recognition off LVS Options IPT a MN CRNMEMNENNME V MEME Mix subtypes during gate recognition Transcript LES YP ng g SU On eese eme scc meces 9 12 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Examples of Recognizable Simple CMOS Gates Examples of Recognizable Simple CMOS Gates POWER POWER MP MP IN4 IN OUT MN GND sie il INVERTER n INPUT NAND INn MN GND 9 13 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Property Tracing Overview Property Tracing Overview After device recognition Calibre makes default and user defined properties available for LVS comparison TRACE PROPERTY statement must be used for each property to make the property available for LVS comparison Internal properties available e MOSFET MN MP MD ME W and L e Diode D A and P e Capacitor C C e Resistor R R 9 14 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 13
73. corresponding cells to the same name if cell names change between layout versions LAYOUT RENAME CELL source cell target cell source cell the cell name in the layout database target cell the new cell name to be assigned as the layout data is read in Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Example LAYOUT BUMP2 Example LAYOUT BUMP2 DATABASE 1 LAYERS DATABASE 2 LAYERS LAYER POLY 1 LAYER POLY 1 LAYER OXIDE 2 LAYER OXIDE 2 LAYER CONTACT 3 LAYER CONTACT 3 LAYER VIAS 31 LAYER VIAS 31 Use LAYOUT BUMP2 to increment all layout2 layer numbers by 100 LAYOUT BUMP2 100 To compare the POLY layer data use XOR XOR 1 101 10 16 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 15 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Sample LVL Rule File Sample LVL Rule File Here is a sample Rule file for doing an LVL comparison 10 17 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Use Calibre to identify an antenna problem in an existing Layout Modify a rule file to output several GDSII files View the generated GDSII files in the Layout viewer
74. file directly after the three layout2 specification statements Now all you need is an actual statement to compare metal2 on the two versions of the layout What will the statement look like metal2 is on layer 10 6 Insert the needed layer compare statement into the diff metal2 rule 7 Save the rule file 8 Load the rule file 9 Run DRC 10 In RVE select Menu Highlight gt Highlight All Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 35 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics If you modified the rule file correctly your display should show seven highlighted areas indicating changes from the original data The display should look similar to below The arrows indicate the highlighted shapes 11 Experiment with different RVE viewing options to better study and visualize the metal2 changes which have been made When you are finished with this lab close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC RVE rule files and Reports 10 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to Launch Calibre Interactive from the command line Explain the three steps required for command line Calibre operation Edit the rule file for command line Calibre operation Invoke a Calibre command line DRC run Invoke a Calibre command line LVS run Read the various reports from the command line Using Ca
75. for Nets NOtice that Source Ports has gone from 19 to 16 This is likely because a single net had more than one port on it which were logically equivalent Notice that the layout has one more net than the source Number of objects in layout different from number in source kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk I INCORRECT OBJECTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LEGEND ne Naming Error same layout name found in source circuit but object was matched otherwise Aside Note that this is a _Legend_ not an actual error Only if ne shows up in the INCORRECT NETS or INCORRECT INSTANCES lists below is there an actual naming error kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk INCORRECT NETS DISC LAYOUT NAME ne SOURCE NAME K k k k IO k k k k k k k k che kk k k k k che kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k kk kk k kk kkk kkk k kkk kkk e kk 1 Net 150 217 000 205 000 N 125 N 125 135 375 406 000 Step Six Skim the Discrepancy or INCORRECT OBJECTS list Notice that there is only a single INCORRECT NETS discrepancy Continue on to Step Seven in the INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section Step Nine Finally look over this list in detail Since you know from the INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section below that Calibre has found a A 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples match f
76. for the TRACE PROPERTY statement but they are beyond the scope of the class If you would like more information see the SVRF Manual Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 15 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition TRACE PROPERTY Examples TRACE PROPERTY Examples Example 1 TRACE PROPERTY MP W W TRACE PROPERTY MP LL e These statements enable LVS to compare width and length in all PMOS devices not specifically covered by any other sub type e The tolerance is 0 Example 2 TRACE PROPERTYCCC2 TRACE PROPERTY CA A2 TRACE PROPERTY CP P2 e These statements enable LVS to compare capacitance area and perimeter in capacitors e Tolerance is 2 tolerance e Note A and P must be user defined 9 17 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation References To find more information about matching reduced transistors when there are fewer transistor in the layout than in the source should be rare in most cases please search for the phrase multiplier in the Calibre User s Manual or look up LVS REDUCE in the SVRF Manual Notes 9 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Reducing Parallel MOS Transistors Reducing Parallel MOS Transistors A A B B To specify whether to perform device reduction LVS REDUCE PARALLEL MOS YES NO Reduces the number of transistors in the Layout to match the number of transistors in the Source to go i
77. gate source and drain e Floating gate with source tied to VDD or VSS e Shorted source and Drain with gate tied to VDD or VSS e Shorted base and emitter Can specify other filtering options using LVS FILTER OPTION 9 21 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Pin Swapping Pin Swapping Occurs when the pin connection order of a primitive is different between source and layout netlists Is allowable when pins of a device or gate primitive are designated as logically equivalent e Resistor pins swappable e Diode pins not swappable Facilitates routing OU E M F Pin Swapping example Pins A B and C are swappable gate pins Pins E and F are swappable device pins 9 22 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 21 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Avoiding False Pin Swap Discrepancies in LVS Avoiding False Pin Swap Discrepancies in LVS Use the rule file to designate swappable pins e Add pin names to Pin Swap list in the DEVICE statement e List pins on a single layer in the DEVICE statement e Addthe LVS RECOGNIZE GATES specification Pins swappable by default include e Device pins with identical names e Source and Drain pins of MOS regular tran
78. in the Files text box Thus is acceptable for this field to be red before running the design This works well for the check fix check fix cycle without requiring you to save your work You should NOT have the name of the GDSII file you have open in DESIGNrev in the File text box Since this file is open for edits in DESIGNrev Calibre will not be able to over write your existing file 3 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC All of the labs use existing files rather than importing the file from the layout viewer Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 3 13 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Rule File Information How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Rule File Information Calibre Interactive DRC i Enter the Rule File Enter Run E m Directory Choose Calibre DRC rules file tudent calibrefusing_calbrfabS golden_rules golden rules 3 17 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes The Load button will parse check the rule file in preparation for a Calibre run It is not necessary to use the Load button unless you would like a quick syntax check for your rule file or have changed the file name since the last DRC run 3 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Outputs How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Outputs
79. in the layout and source Number of objects in layout different from number in source TK ck e coke ec ec e coke coke ck KK RR KR KK RK RK KK RK RK RK RR KK RK RK KKK RK KKK kk kk k k TNCORRECT OBJECTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LEGEND ne Naming Error same layout name found in source circuit but object was matched otherwise Aside Again notice that this isn t an error Its a legend kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk INCORRECT NETS DISCH LAYOUT NAME ne SOURCE NAME kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Step Six At this point it makes sense to go directly to the INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section before even really looking at the discrepancies 1 Net N 10 327 375 68 000 N 9 NAND2 output missing connection 114 333 875 31 000 d 251 325 625 68 000 d 254 333 625 68 000 s missing connection NAND2 output ND 18 MN1 D ND 18 MP2 D A 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples ND 18 MP1 D NAND2 output missing connection 132 381 875 31 000 d 269 373 625 68 000 d 272 381 625 68 000 s missing connection NAND2 output ND 19 MN1 D ND 19 MP2 D ND 19 MP1 D 3 Net N 182 35 375 169 000 no similar net 4 Net N 262 85 375 406 000 000 no similar net 5 Net N 197 63 375 280 000 500000 w no simil
80. inputs and outputs for DRC and LVS checks Perform simple tasks using the Calibre Interactive User interface launched from Calibre DESIGNrev 1 5 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 5 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What Flows Include Calibre What Flows Include Calibre IC Design and Layout Verification Flow e Layout Verification Process Flow for DRC e Layout Verification Process Flow for LVS Mask Manipulation and Mask Data Prep Flow The details for the layout verification process flow for DRC and LVS are given in the next few slides 1 7 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 1 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction IC Design and Layout Verification Flow IC Design and Layout Verification Flow 1 8 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Netlist is normally in SPICE format but is can also be VHDL Verilog or any other format that formally defines the intent of a design Note that Calibre will currently only accept SPICE and Verilog formats Completed layout is not necessarily completely complete You may choose to verify a design when only part of it is complete Calibre provided methods to verify partially completed layouts Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 7 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction
81. kk kkk kkk kkk k LVS PARAMETERS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk o LVS Setup Component Type Properties phy_comp element comp Subtype Property model Pin Name Properties phy_pin Power Net Names VDD Ground Net Names VSS Ignore Ports NO All Capacitor Pins Swappable NO Reduce Parallel Mos Transistors YES Recognize Gates YES Recognize Only Simple Gates NO Reduce Split Gates YES Reduce Parallel Bipolar Transistors YES Reduce Series Capacitors YES Reduce Parallel Capacitors YES Reduce Series Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Diodes YES Filter Unused Mos Transistors NO Filter Unused Bipolar Transistors NO Report List Limit 50 o Numeric Trace Properties Component Component Source Direct Mask Tole Trace Type Subtype Prop Name Prop Name Prop Name rance mn instpar w width w 0 NO mp instpar w width w 0 NO A 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples me instpar w width w 0 NO md instpar w width w 0 NO mn instpar 1 length 1 0 NO mp instpar 1 length 1 0 NO me instpar 1 length 1 0 NO md instpar 1 length 1 0 NO x instpar r resistance gs 0 NO c instpar c capacitance o 0 NO d instpar a area a 0 NO d instpar p perimeter p 0 NO kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk INFORMATION AND WARNINGS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
82. lab5 power lvs OVERALL COMPARISON RESUL _ HERRERA INCORRECT FERRER Different numbers of nets Error Connectivity errors Ambiquity points were found and resolved arbitrarily 8 34 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 33 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Highlight the VDD Net in the Layout Editor Highlight the VDD Net in the Layout Editor Too many highlights to find the problem Need a way to narrow down the short location 8 35 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 34 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens What is LVS ISOLATE SHORTS What is LVS ISOLATE SHORTS Finds the shortest path between two texted nets Outputs a DRC like database of the polygons making up the shortest path Although you access this feature from LVS it is really a DRC type feature function Usethis feature with any texted net Not limited to power ground problems 8 36 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 35 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Set Up LVS Isolate Shorts Set Up LVS ISOLATE SHORTS Calibre In
83. level cell B has already been verified OK Later when top level metal is routed a short occurs between VDD in top level cell A and VSS in low level cell B 8 28 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 27 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens How to Identify Power and Ground Net Problems in the LVS Report How to Identify Power and Ground Net Problems in the LVS Report Clues from the LVS report for a short e Overall Comparison Results states Power or ground net missing in hcell e All Hcells reporting not compared or incorrect Clues for an open e Huge number of discrepancies e One power or ground net in the source matches to two or more nets in the layout 8 29 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Resolving Power and Ground Net Discrepancies Resolving Power and Ground Net Discrepancies Give this task high priority e Problems with major nets may generate false discrepancies on the smaller nets e May be able to fix many problems by fixing a simple power ground problem Verify large designs hierarchically from the bottom up e Verify each individual cell first e Then verify cells higher in the hierarchy Use power
84. may cause one of these results e LVS reports Badly formed power ground net name error if the name violates the syntax rules e LVS reports Contradictory power ground net name error if the same name is used for both a power and a ground net e LVS aborts with the OVER ALL COMPARISION RESULTS listed as NOT COMPARED Overridden by LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR no 8 32 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 31 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Example Simple VDD to VSS Short Example Simple VDD to VSS Short The next set of slides will walk you through finding a VDD to VSS short Run LVS with LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR selected LVS Report File lab5 _power lvs report File Edit Options Windows OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS EERE ERE REE NOT COMPARED GUNEERSERSERNERESERNSIERNSERNISISSERSE Error Power or ground net missing z Fo A Le NUN NENNEN Edt Hp E Bele You know you have a supply problem 8 33 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Run LVS Without ABORT Run LVS Without ABORT RunLVS again e With LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR unselected Obvious short in the layout LVS Report File
85. metal2 E poly enclose cont Fi F RE E Check Text Take note of the Groups and the number of rules in each group Make sure that your groups match those in the illustration If not go back and edit your rule file to make them match First you are only going to run min width checks 10 Choose Menu Checks gt Unselect All Checks Notice that all the rules now have a red x in front of them This is a flag that this rule will not be checked 11 Click on the min width name in the Groups list box Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 21 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics This toggles the rules selection back to green It also changes the rules in that group back to green in the Checks list box The window should look similar to below Select Checks Checks Groups Checks E Checks 4 of 11 selected E Groups 3 E min poly width B win width 4 checks 4 B min metall width X min spacing 6 checks E min metal2 width X win ext 1 checks 0 se E min contact width X min oxide spacing X min pwell spacing X min spacing metall X min spacing metal2 X poly enclose cont i Check Text 12 Run DRC again Notice it is not necessary to close the Select Checks window How many errors do you have this time Are these errors only from the rules in the selected group 13 Close the RVE and Summary Report windo
86. more fixable amount of discrepancies than your first run Now that you have seen the value of hierarchy you are ready to learn how to use additional debugging concepts Close the RVE and Summary Report windows Leave Calibre Interactive DRC open Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 17 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 2 Create and Use Rule Groups In this exercise you will edit the rule file to create groups of rules You will then use these groups to aid in categorizing the type of discrepancies you are encountering 1 Return to the Calibre Interactive Window Rules 2 View the lab4 rules file What 1s in the file Since it is a good practice to never edit your golden rule file we will follow this practice in the lab You will edit the lab4 rules file to create the Rule groups First what is the syntax for grouping commands using the rule file The answer was in the lecture or you can look it up in the Standard Verification Rule Format SVRF Manual 3 Open the golden rule file in a new window a In the text window displaying the lab4 rules file choose Menu File gt Open b Select golden rules from the list of files c Choose OK d In the resulting Open File dialog box choose New Window 4 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics You will notice that the golden rule file naturally groups the rules by three categories What are
87. name e Results database name e Other options Allows the rule file to be re used consistently 11 5 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Specifications are Required in the Rule File All Calibre Runs What Specifications are Required in the Rule File All Calibre Runs LAYOUT SYSTEM e Specifies the layout data format LAYOUT PATH e Specifies the layout data location filename LAYOUT PRIMARY e Specifies the top level cell within the layout data INCLUDE golden rules e Specifies the golden rule file e This is optional you can add all the custom information to your golden rule file 11 6 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 5 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre DRC What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre DRC DRC RESULTS DATABASE Specifies where to save the results Other useful DRC specification statements optional e DRC SUMMARY REPORT Specifies a filename for the DRC Summary Report e DRC MAXIMUM RESULTS Specifies the DRC RuleCheck maximum result count e DRC SELECT CHECK Specifies which RuleCheck statements will be initially selected when the rule fi
88. name for the LVS Report File Calibre Interactive LVS Select view the report after the run Select results database creation ERE DUE eee e Select launching RVE Enter a name for the SVDB directory 7 11 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 9 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Choose Menu Setup gt LVS Options 7 12 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Supply How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Supply LVS Options STERNEN Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 13 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Abort LVS on power ground net errors will save a large amount of wasted computation time Generally a good idea to have this option selected Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 11 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Report How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Report LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report
89. not i s gt 6 7 8 9 10 Instanc be flattened stances Instances Total a Cell Name 7 Scan the new report file of this in this Device Device of this in this Instance Memory Kleaf cell Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contri Contrib Savings hcell FDC 1 gt K 2 3 TFDC HIC Sox 6X 7 THIC ame name _ 2 4 8 34 2 4 t 4 8 32 11 4 8 32 5 5 30 11 5 5 30 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 3 2 6 2 1 3 2 6 1 280 280 100 0 1 190 190 10 10 100 36 1 10 10 5 6 2 1 T 5 6 140 95 140 95 7 40 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Lj LI Notes 7 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server Cont Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server Cont 8 Add a1220 to Hcell list netlist hcell a1220 s1220 9 Generate new hierarchy report netlist report hierarchy layout 10 Scan the new report file 11 Repeat until satisfied with Hcell list 12 Define filename response file test hcells 13 Write custom hcell file netlist report hcells 7 41 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes A complete transcript of the Query Server generating a basic Hcell list is given in Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Transcript of Interactively Creating Hcell File on page C 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 41 June
90. or Calibre CB Hierarchical Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist or Netlist Extraction Layout vs Netlist Layout Files lab9_trace gds Import layout database from layout viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab9 trace Layout Netlist lab9 trace layout spi 6 Enter the following Input Netlist data Netlist Files lab9 trace source spi Import netlist from schematic viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab9_trace 7 Enter the following Rules data Calibre LVS Rules File lab9_trace_rules Calibre LVS Run Directory Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 35 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 8 Enter the following Outputs Report SVDB data LVS Report File View Report after LVS finishes Create SVDB Database Start RVE after LVS finishes Generate data for xCalibre Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data SVDB Directory 9 Run LVS lab9 trace lvs report Selected Selected Selected Unselected Unselected svdb If you get a message box asking to overwrite layout file i lab9_trace gds cancel the message box and return to the Input Note Menu button Layout tab Make sure Import layout database from layout viewer is unselected then try running LVS again What are your results 10 Close all RVE and LVS Report windows Now you want to check the design a little more closely In simulation runs several properties were found to be critical for correct operation You are going to write rules to allow you to ch
91. run e Identify width and spacing discrepancies from a DRC report e Identify width and spacing discrepancies in a layout using Calibre DRC RVE Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 1 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What is the DRC Process What is the DRC Process Process for Finding Correcting and Viewing DRC Results 3 4 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What Types of DRC Problems Can Calibre Find What Types of DRC Problems Can Calibre Find Exterior spacing between objects on the same layer Interior dimensions of an object Extension of one geometry layer across another Overlap of polygons on different layers Other special checks For example metal density 3 5 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 3 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Example Exterior Spacing Problem Example Exterior Spacing Problem Inadequate space between paths Example Rule min space metal2 Minimum external space between metal2 is 3 microns external metal2 3 3 6 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Example Interior Spacing Problem Example Interior Spacing Problem Pol
92. simply told to do If you cannot remember exactly how to perform a task look back at previous Labs List of Exercises Exercise 4 1 Hierarchical vs Flat DRC Runs Exercise 4 2 Create and Use Rule Groups Exercise 4 3 Run DRC Checking on a Select Area Exercise 4 4 Run DRC Skipping Cells Exercise 4 5 Displaying Hierarchical Results in Different Ways Exercise 4 6 Correcting Errors 4 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 1 Hierarchical vs Flat DRC Runs In all the previous labs there have only been a few errors inside cells with only one instance in the design In this lab you will clearly see the benefits of running hierarchical DRC for tracking down where the discrepancies are really happening 1 Change to the lab4 directory cd SHOME using calbr lab4 2 List the files in the directory There should be the following four files in the directory o golden_rules o lab4 gds o lab4 rules o layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev calibredrv 4 Open the GDSII file lab4 gds 5 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer Load Layer Properties 6 Launch Calibre Interactive DRC on cell lab4 7 Tell Calibre Interactive that you will create a new runset You should now have the layout viewer open displaying lab4 gds and the Ca
93. sketch out a portion of the schematic to help visualize the connectivity You may have noticed from the two netlists that cell pin order does not have to agree between Source and Layout as long as the Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens overall connectivity is consistent For example look at the pin numbering used for the 1230 Source cell d 3L 5 1230 The pin numbers used for Layout cell 41230 are different 3 6 40 5 A1230 Using the schematic symbols above and the source and layout netlists as a guide sketch the circuit connectivity for source instances X129 and X144 and for layout instances X125 and X140 Now can you identify the connectivity error 15 Try to identify the port where the open should connect Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 63 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Locate where the un matched net should connect in the layout s is PA A e EL en ih Fg ah lt FPE po ied LIA RAL E EA LLLA TEMOR KAL AGU LALLA EX 2 2 Do not fix anything yet Look at the second discrepancy first to see if the two are related since they are so physically close in the layout 16 Erase all highlights 17 Highlight Net 39 in the second discrepancy Was anything in this error involved in the first one Looking at the layout and the netlists can you find the one correction that will fix both errors 8 64 Us
94. specified properties of device instances Prepares results of device computations for other processes such as LVS comparison or parasitic extraction 2 27 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation References More information on device recognition is covered in Module 9 Device Recognition Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 25 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Built In Device Definitions Built In Device Definitions The following devices have built in device definitions MOS Transistor M MN MP MD ME Diode D Capacitor C Resistor R Bipolar Transistor Q 9 9 9 2 28 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF CMOS Device Example CMOS Device Example total perimeter of gate NSD pins touching the gate region DEV MN NMOS GATE GATE G NSD S NSD D PWELL B 0 5 IN TYPE TRANSISTOR OF MODEL NMOS weffect PROPERTY SPECIFICATION OF 0 5 FOR BENT GATES Length and width are properties computed for MOS transistors by default in meters Width W is taken as half the total perimeter of NSD pins touching the gate region Length L is calculated as gate area divided by width 2 29 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics
95. the text window choose Menu gt Options gt Line Numbers Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF This will add line numbers to the text display The text window will now look like this DRC Rules File lab2 rules ff Golden rule file for use with Lab 2 of the Using Calibre Training Cour ff layer substrate layer nwell layer oxide layer poly layer nplus layer pplus layer contact layer metall layer via layer metal2 layer pwell TOS AO CO 3 0 Cn f tro E CH ifdef STIGHT VARIABLE ml spc 1 5 else VARIABLE ml spc 2 0 endif LEELA ELLE Define boolean layers EEE gate poly AND oxide pgate gate and pplus ngate gate and nplus LE B C P Cg Cg Mg gg P B RN Pg gg gl Minimum width rules HIP B g IP Cg M Pg gg L TELELE ITILITE LITEIT ELITI ELIEL TEI gba min poly width amp Minimum poly width 1 25 int poly 1 25 opposite i Eim f EG o ET Row c Study the rule file carefully to answer the following questions Which line numbers provide names for original GDS layers If the environment variable TIGHT is not defined what is the minimum allowed metall external spacing How many overlap checks appear in this rule file Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 35 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What do you think the derived boolean layers will ultimately be used for 21 Choose Menu File gt Close to c
96. they What rules are under each group Group I Group 2 Group 3 Now you have enough information to write the rule groups Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 4 19 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 4 Click on the Edit button in the lower right of the lab4 rules window This changes the Edit button from red to green indicating that the file is editable 5 Using the group names min width min spacing and min extent write the rule grouping rules in the lab4 rule file 6 Save the lab4 rules file 7 In the Calibre Interactive Window choose Load to load the edited rule file If you have an error in the syntax or a non existent rule typo in the E rule name you will receive an error message when you try to load Note the new rule file Correct any problems and try to load the rules again 8 Close the lab4_rules window and the golden_rules window 9 Choose Menu Setup gt Select Checks 4 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics This opens the Select Checks window It should look similar to below Select Checks Checks Groups Checks Groups E Checks 11 of 11 selected E Groups 3 E min poly width B min width 4 checks 4 E min metall width i min spacing 6 checks E min metal2 width B min ext 1 checks 1 se E min contact width E min oxide spacing Bl min pwel spacing E min spacing metall E min spacing
97. to easy to find are they What instances do they connect to Layout net 22 Layout net 51 Source Where would you look to fix the problem in the layout 16 Close the netlist files Before leaving this exercise you will launch RVE from the command line using the results from the LVS run 17 At the command line prompt type calibre rve svdb Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 35 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What is the svdb and where did it come from Your command opened a Calibre LVS RVE window with the results from the last LVS run automatically loaded 18 Use the RVE interface to verify the LVS problem and how you will fix it 19 When you are done close any open RVE or netlist windows 11 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Exercise 11 3 Command Line to Calibre Interactive In this exercise you will simply launch Calibre Interactive from the command line 1 From the command line type calibre gui This opens a small window which allows you to launch Calibre Interactive DRC LVS RVE and PEX 2 Choose the DRC button This opens the Calibre Interactive DRC application that you have used for all the previous Labs This is just another method to access these tools 3 Close all windows and applications Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 37 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre 11 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004
98. to explore what happened to the cells in the file Open the Source and Layout Netlists Look at the first subcircuit in both netlists What is the name of the first subcircuit Layout Source Look at the rest of the subcircuits in the Source and Layout All the Source subcircuits begin with an s while the layout subcircuits begin with an a Calibre cannot build the hierarchy without perfect matches You can create a matching list for Calibre What is this list called What format does this file use Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 79 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 7 80 Write the list of subcircuits that need to be added to an Hcell file Using any text file editor create a file called lab7b_hcell Enter the Hcell data in the file Hint You need at least seven lines Save and close the file Close all RVE netlist and report windows you may have open Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active Display Inputs HCells Select Use H Cells list from file Enter lab7b hcell Run LVS Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 23 24 25 26 27 Now what kind of errors and warnings do you have What does RVE look like Do you think it will be easier to track down the errors now that the hierarchy is back Open the Source and Layout netlists Expand the error in the r
99. windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive LVS RVE Netlist windows and Summary Report 9 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Use Calibre to identify antenna problems e Create custom output from Calibre e Perform Layout vs Layout comparisons Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 1 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics What is an Antenna What Is an Antenna During the fabrication process metal and poly interconnect paths can act like antennas and build up electrical charge Charges of sufficient magnitude may find a path to ground by arcing from poly through the oxide layer to the well in a gate region thereby damaging or destroying the gate 10 3 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Antenna Rule Basics Antenna Rule Basics Antenna rules identify Layout nets with a significant potential to exhibit antenna related gate damage The ratio of antenna area to gate area known as the Net Area Ratio or NAR serves as a good predictor of damage potential Antenna rules flag nets with NAR s that exceed a specific value I area 1 antenna ratio gate area antenna area 10 4 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Me
100. with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Now you will display the underlying structure of the cell 18 Choose Menu View gt Change Hierarchy Depth gt Increment To Depth This displays all the polygons in the next level of the hierarchy cA FER p Us BLU ED cc EE ERREUR B F4 SEDE AGG 25 A 2d a Lp OMe Soci A OC ts n Grit A ANE Ca Zr MA i 2 A FAENA ll LZ e PIE MA BU Wee PEA A 2 za I i 4 ae Als eo B d m galla H lie PME A 4 ah a i h AA ESA im EA A An EA Thea 2 Zaran A AA WA E EEZ 2 Z B A 2 7 TN MA ZA LZ D EZA e Te OTA TE Mee WE Ir Be 1L E if ii LLLA LL EE LESE d al lia EMI M nim x P 1 W A If you want to fix the problem you would need to display just the cell with the error 19 Note the exact location of the error The highlight will not display when you go into the cell 20 Choose a1720 from the list of cells in the left window Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 57 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC This opens down into cell a1720 WH We IM ETE Ji 2 mt HP rag PALE Hd 4 T a i Wf We CL Ke ig You can use the Back arrow in the Toolbar to view the highlight if you cannot remember its location The Checktext window in Calibre RVE states that this violates the rule where minimum poly width is 1 25 To correct the error you would widen the poly that was highlighted to
101. within the cell containing the short 31220 highlight In DESIGNrev choose Menu View gt Change Hierarchy Depth gt Increment To Depth This displays the underlying polygons Zoom in as necessary to see the structures clearly Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens The results should look similar to below BN SG SS SS is S Ren NS Ji So a pee B DO N N WN NN Nf NS N NI N ANI VDD and VSS are directly shorted in this cell by the long thin polygon down the right side of the cell 36 Erase the highlights 37 Open Cell a1220 in DESIGNrev 38 Fix the short change the following Inputs Layout data 9 39 In Calibre Interactive LVS gds lab8d fixed Layout Files 8 73 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 40 41 8 74 Import layout database from layout viewer SELECTED Layout Netlist lab8d layout net Make sure to change the Layout file name to and select to import the layout database from the viewer Run LVS again to verify your fix Make sure to Import the Layout Database from the Layout Viewer Close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC LVS RVE Netlist windows and Summary Report Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Objectives At the com
102. you will be ready to begin the next lab Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 71 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 3 72 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Use hierarchical runs effectively e Debug effectively using o Rule check grouping o Database window specification o Cell exclusion o Maximum results reporting Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 1 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics What are the Differences between Hierarchical and Flat DRC Runs What are the Differences between Hierarchical and Flat DRC Runs Flat Looks at every geometry in every cell Hierarchical Only looks at the geometries in a single instance of a cell Benefits of Hierarchical e Minimizes redundant processing Stores analyzes and processes data once per cell instead of once for every placement of the cell e Uses design database hierarchy to reduce processing time memory usage and DRC result counts Can use hierarchical for every verification run 4 3 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics When Should I use Hierarchical Runs When Should I use Hierarchical Runs Multiple occurrences of cells If you have a hierarchical license available Every run never a bad time
103. 004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout Boundary Crossing How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout Boundary Crossing How are geometries that cross the boundary handled Default Checks all polygons that cross boundary To clip it at the boundary LAYOUT WINDOW CLIP yes Halo only available from gui Additional area region around selected area e automatic the width is computed as half of the lesser of the width and height of the specified area e values user defined value selection rectangle X zh Lm Halo Original Default Clip automatic 4 10 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Halo will clip Halo will also change the coordinates displayed in the Summary Report Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 9 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Check Everything in the Layout Except a Specified Area How to Check Everything in the Layout Except a Specified Area Need to define area in the rule file Unselect areas using this command in the rule file LAYOUT WINDEL x1 y1 x2 y2 xN yN e Exclude a simple closed polygon window from DRC checking e Window vertex coordinates are with respect to the top cell e Polygons outside of or crossing the window border get processed e May be specifie
104. 04 Module 10 Additional Topics 42 Close the RVE window 43 Close the rule file Leave Calibre Interactive and the layout editor running Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 29 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Exercise 10 2 Create A GDSII Plot File You ve just finished the layout for a new chip and the design engineer has come over to take a look The designer is concerned that some metal2 nets may be longer than current design standards allow The designer asks you to highlight all metal2 nets that are over 100 microns long Let s do it 1 In Calibre Interactive DRC choose the Rules Menu button 2 Use the browser to select file lab10b rules 3 Choose View to see the rule file A text edit window opens containing the rule file DRC Rules File lab1 0b rules me xl Hle Edit Options Windows ff Rule file labl b rules for use with Lab 10 of the Using Calibre Training Cour ff NAHE LEGAME SUE Gd LLLA Insert DRC K MAP statement here HH HH HT HTIITHHTIHE FI M MM II Mff i PATH LENGTH CHECK FPIPM BG JI P C PI long metal2 i Identify all metal2 paths longer than 100u long metal2 edge LENGTH metal2 100 WITH EDGE metal2 long_metal2_edge n INCLUDE golden rules Study the long_metal2 rule The LENGTH statement creates a derived edge layer containing all metal2 edges longer than 100u The WITH EDGE statement highlights all metal2 shapes which contain edges found i
105. 04 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 17 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Highlight the Instance Tracking Shorts Highlight the Instance Click on x36 in the layout netlist to highlight the instance with the short One of the highlighted paths into x36 is shorted 8 19 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Which Path Tracking Shorts Which Path Look at source netlist x35 e Net 15 is the shorted net e Net 15 goes from x29 to x30 e x29 is an a1240 Lookat layout netlist e Net 17 in x36 goes to x35 e x35 matches source x29 e This connection is the short Highlight x35 to isolate the shorted path 8 20 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Closer View of the Layout Tracking Shorts Closer View of the Layout Remove the Highlights Zoom in on the cell to find the problem eet 8 21 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 20 Using Ca
106. 1 Introduction Place the cursor over the area you want to be the new center of the display Click the MMB If you only have a two button mouse click both buttons at the same time The layout display re centers itself around the new center 8 Selecting Polygons a Choose the Select icon from the Toolbar Menu Make sure the Select icon is selected Unselect all selection types except poly 4 ref 4 path W poly Jede J vrix J text Select any single item in the layout by clicking on it with the LMB The selected polygon will highlight 9 Unselecting polygon s a b Choose the Select icon from the Toolbar Menu Make sure the Select icon is selected Click the LMB in an empty area of the layout The unselected polygon will loose its highlight 10 Selecting more than one polygon a Choose the Select icon from the Toolbar Menu b Make sure the Select icon is selected Hold down the CTRL key and click the LMB on the desired polygon The selected polygon will highlight Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 53 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction c Repeat until you have selected all the desired polygons The selected polygons will highlight as they are selected 11 Unselecting just one polygon from a group of selected polygons a Choose the Select icon from the Toolbar Menu Make sure the Select icon is selected b Hold down the CTRL key and click the LMB on the undesi
107. 1 09 27 13 2002 Rule File Pathname golden rules __ rn metal2 spacing 3 0 e 122500 347500 126500 347500 123000 348000 129458 348000 0 0 5 Nov 21 09 27 13 2002 Rule File Pathname golden rules _ Enclosure of contact by poly must be 1 micron Exception enclosure in direction of current flow Direction of current flow is defined as any direc in which metal encloses a contact edge by more th metall enclose cont 0 0 2 Nov 21 09 27 13 2002 Rule File Pathname golden rules __ Minimum enclosure of contact bv me min ext oxide poly 1 1 2 Nov 21 09 27 13 2002 Rule File Pathname golden rules Minimum enclosure of poly by oxide 1 25 e12 317875 369000 319125 369000 317875 368500 319125 368500 3 34 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 31 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Use the DRC Results Database RVE How to Use the DRC Results Database DRC RVE Calibre DRC RVE dre results RVE uses the results database to display the results in graphical form RVE can be invoked automatically at the end of a DRC run 3 35 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC DRC RVE GUI Callout Rule File Pathname Minimum poly width Cell lab2 Check min poly width 1 of 1 Error 3
108. 1 E 8 5 a1240 T 64500 11 X17 VSS VDD 52 51 10 a1220 T 40500 17000 X21 VSS 3 VDD 7 4 a2311 T 48500 355000 0 X26 VSS VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56500 2290 X29 VSS VDD 15 5 8 E 23 a1240 T 64500 11 X30 VSS VDD 10 15 13 a1220 S T 88500 17000 X40 VSS VDD 53 17 54 a1220 T 112500 1700 X41 VSS VDD 11 21 3 12 16 a1240 T 128500 X44 VSS 6 VDD 22 19 55 a1620 T 96500 3551 v O tee 0n tmn 10 29 40211 m 1na4cnn 110nn SE N 65 EP 0 IP 402 FDC 280 MO VSS 4 2 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i Mi 4 5 VSS VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i M2 VSS 6 4 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i M3 VDD 4 2 VDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X L 7 5e 07 W 2e 05 X 334 x MA 52 5 VDD VDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x M5 4 6 52 VDD p L Xi4 VSS VDD 53 54 a1310 T 24500 17000 C VSS VDD 7 iE 10 a1220 T 24500 2290C X16 VSS VDD 8 12 11 a1220 T 24500 3550C X17 VSS VDD 15 53 jl 12 9 a1240 T 64500 X23 VSS VDD 54 55 14 a1220 T 40500 170C X27 VSS VDD 11 7 8 a2311 T 48500 35500C X32 VSS VDD 7 9 16 18 91230 T 56500 226 X35 VSS VDD 9 19 12 27 a1240 T 6450C XA vee unn 01 07 CR 10 17 14 Tew 1 ome You may need to scroll the netlists to view all the highlights What happened What did you learn about net and instance names How easy do you think it would be to match these by hand 47 Optional Try matching one of the instances by hand 48 Make the layout viewer window active What do you see Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 7 59 Module 7 Ba
109. 10 Additional Topics The RVE window should look similar to below Calibre DRC RYE lab10 drc results 22 In the RVE window select Menu Setup gt Options 23 In the RVE Options window choose the Highlight tab 24 Select option Zoom cell view to highlights by 25 Enter 0 9 as the zoom factor 26 Choose OK to execute the dialog box 27 Position the RVE and Calibre DRC windows so that you can clearly see the layout you may want to minimize the DRC window for now 28 In the RVE window select Menu Highlight gt Highlight All 10 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics This will highlight shapes in the layout belonging to bad antennas The DESIGNrev window should look similar to below a2311 B a a1 B a2311 B 1i Ji 2 aie a How many bad antennas have been identified Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 25 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 34 38 10 26 How could you improve the results to better see the antennas Choose the Eraser icon in the RVE window to clear all highlights Close RVE In the Calibre window select the Rules Menu button Choose View next to the rule file name Take a good look at the antenna rule Which layer s will be highlighted by this rule Let s improve our antenna rule so that it highlights shapes from all three antenna net layers poly metall an
110. 14 04 47 PST 2002 OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS PREPARA PERE RE RRR CORRECT GREEN a SS A E E Z ou DD Ecit Row eu 8 9 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Opens Summary Tracking Opens Summary Lookat LVS Report first e Net number discrepancy e nets in Source lt nets in Layout e One Source net matched to two Layout nets Use RVE e Display first discrepancy e Display source netlist e Display layout netlist e Highlight net information from discrepancies one at a time e Check highlighted nets in layout for obvious problems Correct the problem Re run LVS to check the correction 8 10 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 9 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Identifying Shorts Using the LVS Report Identifying Shorts Using the LVS Report Initial Error message warns about different number of nets File Viewer user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 lvs_shorts File Edit Options Windows HHRRRRHRRR AEA RE RRR RS INCORRECT EERE RE Error Different numbers of nets see below Error Different numbers of instances see below Error Connectivity errors Warning Ambiguity points were f
111. 2 1 1 6 6 2 1 0 0 a1720 140 140 MN 140 140 MP Hierarchy Tree Devices Cell Name in this Cel lab7b level 0 a1220 x10 level 1 MN x2 level 2 MP x2 level 2 6 a1230 x5 level 1 MN x3 level 2 MP x3 level 2 8 a1240 x4 level 1 MN x4 level 2 MP x4 level 2 2 a1310 x3 level 1 MN x1 level 2 MP x1 level 2 6 a1620 x3 level 1 MN x3 level 2 s MP x3 level 2 6 a1720 x1 level 1 MN x3 level 2 MP x3 level 2 10 a2311 x10 level 1 MN x5 level 2 MP x5 level 2 8 ICV 1 x6 level 1 4 a1220 x2 level 2 MN x2 level 3 MP x2 level 3 OK netlist hcell a2311 s2311 netlist report hierarchy layout CALIBRE Lvs HCELL ANALYSIS AND HIERARCHY TREE REPORT Top Level Data Netlist file lay net Total Flat Device Count TFDC 280 count of all devices represented flat Total Hierarchical Instance Count THIC 200 count of all devices expanded to hcells C 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Potential Hcell Analysis This report presents information useful for selecting LVS hcells for a netlist Cells are presented in order of potential memory savings if the cell is used as an hcell Column Definitions Flat The following columns present statistics concerning the flattened design 1 Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated throughout the e
112. 2 30 1995 CURRENT DIRECTORY tmp mnt net bentley user3 train3 icv USER NAME train3 Step Two Notice that this header refers to all the correct pathnames 3e ke ke RK RK RK KK e ee kk kk kk KR KK RK e eoe RR RK RK KKK KR ke ke ke ke ke e ke ee OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HHHHHH HHH HHH HHH HH INCORRECT god HHHHHH HHH HHH HHH HE EE Error Different numbers of nets see below Step Three This LVS comparison result is INCORRECT The problem is described in general as Different numbers of nets This could mean anything from misconnects to shorts or opens Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 19 ia Nets 356 154 Instances 140 140 mn 4 pins Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 1 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples 140 140 mp 4 pins Total Inst 280 280 Step Four The main thing no notice in this INITIAL NUMBERS OF OBJECT report is that layout and source contain the same kinds of objects NUMBERS OF OBJECTS AFTER TRANSFORMATION Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 16 Nets 74 73 Instances 25 25 NAND2 3 pins 7 7 INV 2 pins 10 10 AOI 2 1 4 pins 5 5 NAND3 4 pins 11 11 NOR2 3 pins 4 4 NAND4 5 pins Total Inst 62 62 Step Five Here it is apparent that Calibre has transformed the xtors into logical gates and is recognizing the same numbers of everything in the layout and source except
113. 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Automatically Create Hcell File Meeting a Threshold Automatically Create Hcell File Meeting a Threshold 1 Launch the Query Server 2 Automatch Hcells by name 3 Match Hcells by placement count 4 Read the rule file 5 Name the current Hcell file 6 Set the evaluation threshold to 10 7 42 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Notes 7 42 calibre query netlist automatch on netlist placementmatch on netlist read rule file netlist hcells thold hcells netlist evaluation threshold 10 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Automatically Create Hcell File Meeting a Threshold Cont Automatically Create Hcell File Meeting a Threshold Cont 7 Ignore Hcells in the current Hcell file netlist evaluate current hcells no OR 7 Clear the hcells in the current list netlist clear hcells 8 Generate Hcell report netlist select hcells 9 Specify Hcell file response file thold hcells 10 Generate the new Hcell file netlist report hcells 7 43 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes A complete transcript of the Query Server generating a basic Hcell list is given in Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Transcript of Updating an Existing Hcell File Using a New Threshold on page C 11 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 43 J
114. 3 2 6 21 3 2 6 2 0 4 al310 1 280 280 100 0 1 280 280 100 0 0 0 lab7b il 6 6 Pli 1 6 6 25 0 0 al720 140 140 MN 140 140 MP Adding what cell to the hcell file will give the most savings 5 Add cell a2311 to the hcell list Type netlist hcell a2311 s2311 Remember that the source cells for this design all begin with s 6 Generate a new hierarchy report Type netlist report hierarchy layout i Flat TES UM With Hcells 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Instances Devices Total Total Instances Instances Total Total 4 Cell Name of this in iem Device Device of this in n Instance Instance Memory leaf cell Gell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings hcell ED 1 x 2 3 TFDC HIC 5 x 8 7 THIC same name same Eisen e ind 22 4 88 3l 22 4 88 44 31 al220 4 8 32 11 4 8 32 16 10 al240 5 6 30 11 5 6 30 15 9 5 al230 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 9 4 5 al620 2 6 2 1 3 2 6 0 5 al310 1 280 280 100 0 1 190 190 95 0 0 lab b 10 10 100 36 1 10 10 5 0 0 a2311 1 6 6 7 Il 1 6 6 3 0 0 al720 140 95 MP 140 95 MN 7 84 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 10 11 12 13 Now what cell will give the most savings Can you tell that a2311 is an hcell Add cell a1220 to the hcell list Type netlist hcell a1220 s1220 Check what is in the current Hcell list Type netlist report hcells
115. 4 2003 TOTAL CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME PROCESSOR COUNT 1 SUMMARY REPORT FILE lab4_hier_report Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example View Report Command Line Calibre DRC Example View Report Terminal RULECHECK RESULTS STATISTICS RULECHECK min poly width TO RULECHECK min metall width TO RULECHECK min metal2 width TO RULECHECK min contact width TO RULECHECK min oxide spacing TO RULECHECK min pwell spacing TO Bit min LSpacing metall TT HECK poly enclose cont PET RULBCHECK metall_enclose_cont T RULECHECK min ext oxide poly T al ayer Geometries ZE 3435 2 13 11 24 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 23 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Results DB Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Results DB Terminal fo Q 2 Feb ii TE 3l 34 2003 Rule File Pathname lab4 rules Minimum metal2 EIE 3 0 poly enclose c dee lo s 2 Feb 1 T EE ET 2003 Rule File Pathname lab4 rules m enclosure of contact by metall 625 65625 370175 67375 370175 65167 369750 67833 369750 min_ext_oxide_poly 1 1 2 Feb 11 ll 31 34 2003 Rule File Path
116. 76500 355000 0 0 x X87 VSS VDD 26 13 31 s1220 T 208500 17000 1 180 x X94 VSS 31 VDD 58 12 s2311 T 200500 118000 0 0 x X95 VSS 14 VDD 28 33 31620 T 200500 355000 0 0 X97 VSS VDD 18 32 s1230 T 239000 229000 1 1 X98 VSS VDD 27 31220 T 232500 17000 1 180 x X113 VSS 16 VDD VSS VDD 7 61 32 a2311 T 152500 118000 0 0 x X82 VSS VDD 17 34 29 30 29 60 ICV 1 T 184500 1700C El Top Network Subckts X84 VSS VDD 16 35 20 2 a1230 T 168500 229000 0 0 o a9500 X87 WSS VDD 31 62 33 a1220 T 176500 355000 0 0 x grana X97 VSS VDD 62 34 16 a2311 T 200500 118000 0 D x X98 VSS 18 VDD 31 36 El a1620 T 200500 355000 0 0 El a1220 X100 VSS VDD 26 22 38 35 a1230 T 239000 229000 1 1 maize X101 VSS VDD 40 39 63 28 37 30 ICV 1 T 232500 170C X116 VSS VDD Gi 20 36 42311 T 232500 355000 0 0 x B a2311 X120 vss VDD 16 38 18 a1220 T 263000 229000 1 180 B 21230 f X124 VSS VDD 2 64 20 a2311 T 248500 118000 0 0 sx f X128 VSS VDD 17 39 64 a1220 T 280500 17000 1 180 s B ICV 1 X131 VSS VDD 42 32 41 26 a1230 T 295000 229000 1 VSS Bl a1620 VDD 28 40 43 a1220 T 280500 17000 0 0 X a 0 P aran Am eenran aArrAan A a 7 27 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 25 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer How to
117. 8 1587 LAYER poly TOTAL Original Geometry Count 26 324 LAYER oxide TOTAL Original Geometry Count 70 472 LAYER metall TOTAL Original Geometry Count 119 517 LAYER metal2 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 189 487 RULECHECK min_poly_width TOTAL Result Count 1 1 RULECHECK min metall width TOTAL Result Count 0 0 RULECHECK min metal2 width TOTAL Result Count 0 0 ur Eun L TEE rj Row i f Calibre ignores layers that are not involved in a check 3 31 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Summary Report Cell Statistics How to Read the DRC Summary Report Cell Statistics What cells have discrepancies DRC Summary Report drc summary RULECHECK min_oxide_spacing Result RULECHECK min_pwell spacing Result RULECHECK min spacing metall Result RULECHECK min spacing metal2 Result RULECHECK poly enclose cont Result RULECHECK metall enclose cont Result RULECHECK min ext oxide poly Result ULECHECK RESULTS STATISTICS BY CELL CELL lab2 TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min poly width TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min spacing metal2 TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min ext oxide poly TOTAL Result Count TOTAL CPU Time TOTAL REAL Time 3 32 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Ment
118. 87 This window displays the results of the DRC check in text format In later modules you will cover how to read the report for now you may what to just skim the report to see the type of information available 27 When you are finished viewing the report close the report window Choose Menu File gt Close 1 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction The other application launched at the end of the DRC run is Calibre RVE Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 37 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Exercise 1 3 View a Discrepancy with Calibre RVE In the exercise you will learn how to use RVE to view discrepancies and highlight them in the layout 1 Make the RVE window active Calibre DRC RVE lab dre results Hle View Highlight Setup i E A 4 Cell Top B 1 Error in 1 of 11 Checks Celllabl 1 Error checktext window Cell lab1 1 Error message area This window has pulldown Menus that are similar to any application It also has a Toolbar for the commands used most frequently The icons from left to right are o Open Database 1 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction o Erase Highlights o Highlight Previous Discrepancy o Highlight Current Discrepancy o Highlight Next Discrepancy o Set Highlight Zoom The Results Viewing Area contains a tree structure of the DRC results
119. ATA 2 e Rule file VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON YES e This will NOT virtually connect to an existing net DATA 6 10 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 9 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 2 VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 2 Virtually connect all disjoint nets beginning with VDD e Connect VDD pll to VDD clk to VDD addr under the net name VDD e Then connect to original VDD e Rule file VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON YES VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME VDD CONNECT COLON CONNECT NAME 6 11 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How to Create Virtual Connections from Calibre Interactive How to Create Virtual Connections from Calibre Interactive Menu Button Calibre Interactive LVS LVS Options gt Connect VIRTUAL COLON CONNECT VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME 6 12 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 11 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity What are Soft Connections What are Soft Connections The use of a high resistivity layer to connect two conductors creates a soft connection Soft connections are usually undesirable for electrical performance reasons Soft connections satisfy LVS requi
120. B Hierarchical Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist or Netlist Extraction Layout vs Netlist Layout Files lab7b gds Import layout database from layout viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab7b Layout Netlist lab7b layout net 5 Enter the following Input Netlist data Netlist Files lab7b source spi Import netlist from schematic viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab7b 6 Enter the following Input HCells data Match cells by name automatch Selected Use H Cells list from file Unselected filename does not matter Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 77 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 7 Enter the following Rules data Calibre LVS Rules File 1ab7 rules Calibre LVS Run Directory 8 Enter the following Outputs Report SVDB data LVS Report File lab7b lvs report View Report after LVS finishes Selected Create SVDB Database Selected Start RVE after LVS finishes Selected Generate data for xCalibre Unselected Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data Unselected SVDB Directory svdb 9 Run LVS What are your results Check the LVS Report What types of errors and warnings do you have 10 Look at LVS RVE 7 78 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 11 12 13 Without opening any file or even expanding the errors in the Results Viewing area is there a difference between this run and previous LVS runs Before you do anything else you need
121. CIFY LAYER 50 AS A TEXT LAYER ATTACH 50 metal2 ATTACH TEXT TO TARGET LAYER 5 13 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting Example of Implicitly Attached Text Example of Implicitly Attached Text TEXT LAYER metal2 CONNECT metall metaD BY via establish connectivity 4 5 14 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 13 June 2004 Module 5 Texting Example of Freely Attached Text Example of Freely Attached Text TEXT LAYER 50 SPECIFY LAYER 50 AS A TEXT LAYER LABEL ORDER metall metal2 SPECIFY ATTACHMENT PRIORITY 5 15 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What about Case Sensitivity What about Case Sensitivity Calibre treats all SPICE netlist names as case insensitive by default You can control case sensitivity through rules file commands Similar to other rule statements 5 16 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 15 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Control Case Sensitivity How to Control Case Sensitivity Controlled by statement in rules file Applies to model names node names subcircuit names an
122. Connectivity and CONNECT NAME eterne 6 37 Module 7 Basic LV SCOmce pts ioo ort e n HARE RI QVE OI IMS ER FIRED ER RIVE RN IQ RI RM OPI UE 7 1 JDIectives ved enis uiuis bep Erba bon ut uid ddl dtu Rotes usc L nS dt 7 1 What is Layout vs ele miatie Fass eco dee saves wears e d e PX PC PY vacet e ees 7 2 What Files Does Calibre Need to Perform LVS essen 7 3 How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive ues 7 4 How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive esses 7 5 How to Use Calibre LVS Load Runset and Rules ssssusss 7 6 How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Layout essere 7 7 How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Netlist sese 7 8 How to Use Calibre LVS Define the Output Files sess 7 9 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options esseseeenenenenes 7 10 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Supply 7 11 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Report seeseeeeee 7 12 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Gates essere 7 13 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Shorts eseseessss 7 14 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options ERC eere 7 15 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Connect sssesesee 7 16 How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Includes esesssse 7 17 How to Use Ca
123. Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer UU Calibre DESIGNTev ESOS File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Z 4 R glx f og Y 2 All Back forth Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch a bookmarks a layouts W ref W poly 4 edge 4 vrix W text Layers lt lt lt 321 8974 481 831 gt Layers A O 20 i Hierarchy 176 936 342 546 gt Layout labSb gds Cell labSb Depth O Grid off 7 28 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer How to Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer ZL OTE E A LM D SM V LLL LLL LLL LLL LL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LL LLL ELL LLL LLL LLL WLLL BR VRHVILERTH THEE TETTE a a a LI a i LLL Xs dd JD A AL VILLE EFI HATHU EIE RE CALL VAT VEFFEHUSU HII EFE LLALLA SE VEFEFEA DY HH 22777777 ZZ AE LA A fA LLENA 4 A A A D A 2277777 LLL ERREUR T_T SLD LLL TET LALIT TILL PTET LLL T DTD T LLII LLA iu 277777 LLL 1 ZEE E 7 29 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 7 27 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What is LVS BOX What is LVS BOX Ignores a
124. DOS nial ts teat scat Aetna bit ota eb aberat 2 2 What is the Syntax for Rule Statements sss 2 3 What about Case Sensitivity 1 eet iei citati ee A b RE Cb atu i Onda eben 2 5 Is Rule Order Important suoni toten Doe aa accetta rta qo tate oid 2 6 What are Conditional Rules oed e eoru deb ap eio E ERAS 2 7 How to use Conditional Rules sess nnne 2 8 Rule HIICIenOy cares cons savers cease tee etas taradoahteneeeactiduet teenies ested as 2 9 Unig eFeat r s ap 2 Hi 01 ol lep ener e mmr ere nenT a mente Aetas 2 10 Data Reduction Examples eec tto tie bp E ats e p n seti s e Es 2 11 Combining Data Reduction and Unique Features Example 2 12 Including Other RuleJBIeS ss otedrio ausa co eA Dee ber euim Prio hederae 2 13 What Does it Mean that Calibre is an Edge Based Tool 2 14 Why Does Calibre Only Highlight Part of an Edge sesssssssssss 2 15 What are Typical DRC Rules ioci tenen tet tete eee 2 16 MICE TOO esteso tct na fret odes e tiundisd dimus E es tos Sead Rud RU M sten ute 2 17 Interior Racing Edge Checks oso eme np iucutiae EU DErav cS Ue EIE I NE ENS R STU SE VIRI 2 18 Overlap Checks s noto hid dca ceps E a ta psi lacini date tuens 2 19 Exterior Facing Edge Checks acus pe eer oc teer oed etc EA names 2 20 External De ek S auo ceto c reati cba laals E Ra vu Laus A aea 2 21 Enclosure and Extension Checks cccccccccessse
125. E OF CONTENTS Cont Example Report of Unmatched Text Names seen 5 19 How to Identify Incorrectly Placed Text in the Layout ssessse 5 20 How to Identify when LVS does not Recognize Text eese 5 21 How to Identify Power Ground Texting Problems eesssssse 5 22 What is a POLT asatro n cobalt ict tek adus pao Cof eom iss pa Mme aed 5 23 How to Use Port Texting occae NOH PEE m S EUR De NONU USE U DEVE Ne IURE 5 24 Lab Informaton 4 2o ocu cooteldce iterari crab deseado cU esas dara Ed oat dite nde da 5 25 IAD Wo VIERNES RR SEC v 5 26 Exercise 5 1 Find a Misspelled Layout Text Label sse 5 27 Exercise 5 2 Find a Badly Placed Layout Text Label 00 cee cecccceeseceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenseenes 5 32 Exercise 5 3 Find Non functional Text Annotations sse 5 39 Module 6 CGOMTCCUIVILY iL AR 6 1 ODJECUVES eee Po 6 1 How does Calibre Establish Connectivity sse 6 2 Review of the CONNECT Statement Hard Connections ussss 6 3 M hats Vitt al Connect siseses re Ore erae tise ya kr dax a sia pma EE RU 6 4 What is VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME esee eene 6 5 VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Example eerie ettet etn tn nnne 6 6 More VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Examples esee 6 7 What is VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON eessseeeeeeeeeren ener 6 8 VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 1
126. ECT Operator Specifies soft connections between upper and lower layer polygons that overlap e Upper layer must appear in a connectivity statement e Lower layers may not appear in any connectivity based statement e Up to 32 lower layers may be specified Passes established connectivity from the upper layer polygons onto the first encountered overlapping lower layer polygons one directional Byitself this statement generates no warnings even if there are soft connections 6 18 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 17 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity The SCONNECT Operator Syntax The SCONNECT Operator Syntax Syntax SCONNECT upper layer lower layerl lower layer2 BY layerN LINK ink name ABUT ALSO BY layerC specifies an intermediate contact layer LINK ink name specifies a node name for floating polygons on any lower layer ABUT ALSO specifies that polygon abutment is a valid connection Used with e LVSSOFTCHK e LVS REPORT OPTION S 6 19 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How to Generate Reports from SCONNECT Data How to Generate Reports from SCONNECT Data LVS SOFTCHK selects polygons involved in conflicting connections from an SCONNECT statement and generates a r
127. ELLTIE WELL LVS SOFTCHK WELL UPPER LVS REPORT OPTION S METAL1 INTERNALLY ASSIGNED NET METAL1 VSS Soft connections reported in svdb layout_primary softchk 6 22 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 21 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Lab Information Lab Information In this lab session you will Setup and invoke Calibre LVS to detect a soft connection error using STAMP Use Calibre DRC to find soft connection polygons Use Calibre LVS to detect a soft connection error using SCONNECT Examine the softchk database A 6 23 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation a Notes 6 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Lab Connectivity In this lab you will explore hard and soft connections using Calibre LVS Again you will be using LVS without a formal introduction so you will enter most of the data using runsets List of Exercises Exercise 6 1 Finding a Hard Connection Error Not Shorts or Opens Exercise 6 2 Use STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors Exercise 6 3 Use DRC and STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors Exercise 6 4 Use SCONNECT to Find Soft Connection Errors Exercise 6 5 Connectivity and CONNECT NAME Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 23 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Exercise 6 1 Finding a Hard Connect
128. ESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Summary Report RuleCheck Results How to Read the DRC Summary Report RuleCheck Results Which rules have violations DRC Summary Report drc summary File Edit Options Windows LAYER metal2 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 189 487 RULECHECK RESULTS STATISTICS RULECHECK min poly width Result Count RULECHECK min metall width Result Count RULECHECK min metal2 width Result Count RULECHECK min contact width Result Count RULECHECK min oxide spacing Result Count RULECHECK min pwell spacing Result Count RULECHECK min spacing metall TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min spacing metal2 TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK poly enclose cont TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK metall enclose cont TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min ext oxide poly TOTAL Result Count ooOoH oocoooon JA Sai a EN pow i coll it Line numbers on the report are optional 3 30 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 27 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Summary Report Layer Statistics How to Read the DRC Summary Report Layer Statistics What layers were checked DRC Summary Report drc summary RUNTIME WARNINGS ORIGINAL LAYER STATISTICS LAYER pwell TOTAL Original Geometry Count 7 48 LAYER contact TOTAL Original Geometry Count 23
129. GS osa pore adeee ouo AQ mi ome duet ose var Me Edd a e 3 9 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Load Layout eese 3 10 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launch Calibre Interactive 3 11 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Enter Layout Information 3 12 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Rule File Information 3 14 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Outputs esses 3 15 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Run Control 3 16 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options esee 3 17 How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launching a Run s 3 22 How to Read the DRC Transcript 2 5 rh ree eee eh E een eaa 3 23 How to Read the DRC Transcript L VHEAP Statistics 3 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev vii June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont What are LVHEAP Statistics sostecedu ied tenfes ae ERE UR EROR DERUE deanlet oka 3 25 What Information is in the DRC Summary Report esses 3 26 How to Read the DRC Summary Report RuleCheck Results 3 27 How to Read the DRC Summary Report Layer Statistics sussse 3 28 How to Read the DRC Summary Report Cell Statistics sssss 3 29 How to Read the DRC Summary Report Hierarchical and Flat Counts 3 30 How to Use t
130. Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Transcript How to Read the DRC Transcript Calibre Interactive DRC Note Bottom of the transcript 3 26 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 23 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Transcript LVHEAP Statistics How to Read the DRC Transcript LVHEAP Statistics 3 27 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright O 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What are LVHEAP Statistics What are LVHEAP Statistics LVHEAP Statistics e Reports current memory usage for Calibre DRC DRC H e Numbers are in megabytes LVHEAP 28 47 49 snm iam reno e The maximum memory requirement high water mark of Calibre up to that point in the run is the third number 3 28 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 25 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What Information is in the DRC Summary Report What Information is in the DRC Summary Report RuleCheck results Number and types of layers checked Are the violations in cells or at the top level 3 29 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 26 Using Calibre with D
131. HTHHTHHHTHHHHHHEHHEHHEH HHH HHH BEBE EHH EHH REPORT FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs rep LAYOUT NAME LVS ONLINE layout M foo 4 SOURCE NAME LVS ONLINE logic ictraceM default LVS MODE Mask RULE FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs online layout master rules CREATION TIME Thu Jul 6 08 25 45 1995 CURRENT DIRECTORY tmp mnt net bentley user3 train3 icv USER NAME train3 Step Two Check the header Its OK in this case kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HHTHHTHHHTHHHHHHHHHHHH god INCORRECT god HHTHHTHHTHHHHHHHHHHHH Error Different numbers of nets see below Step Three The overall result is incorrect with a differing number of nets Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 19 Nets 354 154 Instances 140 140 mn 4 pins 140 140 mp 4 pins Total Inst 280 280 NUMBERS OF OBJECTS AFTER TRANSFORMATION Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 16 Nets 72 73 Instances 25 25 NAND2 3 pins 7 7 INV 2 pins 10 10 AOI 2 1 4 pins 5 5 NAND3 4 pins 11 11 NOR2 3 pins 4 4 NAND4 5 pins Total Inst 62 62 Number of objects in layout different from number in source Step Four Note that ICtrace is recognizing the same numbers of everything except for nets Fewer nets in Layout than Source can mean short circuits kckckckckckckckckckckckokok KKK KKK K
132. II or CIF and directs output to spice file name When you specify this option with Ivs Calibre extracts a Spice netlist from the layout system and uses it in place of the original layout system for comparison against the source turbo no of cpus This switch instructs Calibre LVS H to use multi threaded parallel processing The no of cpus argument is a positive integer that specifies the number of CPUs to use in the processing If no value is specified Calibre LVS H runs on the maximum number of CPUs available 11 16 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 15 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS Cont What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS Cont hcell ce correspondence file name This switch specifies a cell correspondence file for hierarchical LVS comparison mergedatabase This switch directs the GDSII reader to merge geometries on a per cell per layer basis as it reads the stream into memory Generally you would use this only for databases created by module generator tools that redundantly place geometries on top of each other 64 This switch invokes the 64 bit version of Calibre nowait This switch instructs the MGLS license queuing features to be disabled This results in Calibre exiting instead of
133. IP 10 FDC 8 X0 12354 a1220 T 24000 0 0 0 X 2 gt gt SUBCKT lebTa N 65 EP IP 402 FDC 280 MO VSS 4 2 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i Ml 4 5 WSS VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i M2 VSS 6 4 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i M3 VDD 4 2 WDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X X27 VSS VDD 11 7 8 a2311 T 48500 35500t 20 Use unn 7 Q i amp 10 192N em t amp rnn ooc We AA gt gt SUBCKT lab7a N 65 EP 0 IP 402 FDC 280 VSS 4 2 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i 4 5 VSS VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i VSS 6 4 VSS n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 i VDD 4 2 VDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x 52 5 VDD VDD p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 4 6 52 VDD p L 7 5e 07 W 2e 05 X 334 x14 VSS VDD 53 54 a1310 T 24500 17000 C VSS VDD 7 13 10 a1220 T 24500 2290C X16 VSS VDD 8 12 11 a1220 T 24500 3550C X17 VSS VDD 15 53 13 12 9 91240 T 6450C X23 VSS VDD 54 55 14 91220 T 40500 170C X27 VSS VDD 11 7 8 a2311 T 48500 35S00C W Wee unn T O 1 amp 10 3199N m cECNN ooc Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What happened How can these instances with different names match 46 Click on Net 9 on instance X9 in the source netlist gt gt EEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE EEEEEEEEEEE SUBCKT lab7a N 62 EP IP 419 FDC 280 X8 VSS VDD 51 50 a1310 T 24500 17000 0 0 VSS VDD E 3 6 a1220 T 24500 229000 0 X10 VSS VDD 8 4 7 a1220 T 24500 355000 0 Xii VSS VDD 50 1
134. IR UES ie rt ut Lr et v Ep Ete aai d NDA Pci Ne EHE 4 5 Howto Group Rules 25d acier ee b tee ER ror od e beu 4 6 How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From Calibre Interactive 4 7 How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From the Rule File 4 8 viii Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout Boundary Crossing 4 9 How to Check Everything in the Layout Except a Specified Area 4 10 How to Skip Cells During the DRC Check eee 4 11 How to Limit the Number of Discrepancies in the Report suuusss 4 12 Lab Informationen nei respirar cuo ci Pe tei E rend tat ia de Ur avant Dou eR Aon 4 13 Lab Advanced DRC Skills tutes Ere irE bn eee De eser git uei Rr E DA 4 14 Exercise 4 1 Hierarchical vs Flat DRC Runs 5553 cto cad eria P dead vi ru e 4 15 Exercise 4 2 Create and Use Rule Groups 5 asco pereat ete Dot eer c hee tdg 4 18 Exercise 4 3 Run DRC Checking on a Select Area sss 4 24 Exercise 4 4 Run DRC Skipping Cells ts denied peace e a Re e aes mui adu e 4 27 Exercise 4 5 Displaying Hierarchical Results in Different Ways eee 4 29 Exercise 4 0 Correcting BFEOIS oe niiina oos IN RTI NA DEA en D EN I eb inate 4 34 Module 5 oq O 5 1 OD PCH VES aoo ete oS odes pe EN PERI Dalee ente Gasman ero brie tances 5
135. IRTUAL CONNECT NAME Examples Virtually connect all disjoint nets whose name begins with ADDR e For example Connect ADDROO to ADDROO and connect ADDRO1 to ADDRO1 e This does NOT connect ADDROO to ADDRO1 e Rule statement VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME ADDR Virtually connect any disjoint nets with the same name e Rule statement VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME 6 8 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity What is VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON What is VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Specification statement in the rule file Specifies whether virtual connections are made between nets having names containing the colon character Syntax VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON YES NO e YES virtually connects disjoint nets having names containing the colon character if their names are identical up to the first colon character e NO preserves the existing connectivity e Default NO Applies only to nets in the top level cell Calibre discards the colon suffix in the resulting net name You may only use this statement once 6 9 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 1 VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON Example 1 Virtually connect three disjoint nets named DATA 0 DATA 123 and D
136. June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 13 Click on the RuleCheck min poly width 1 Error 7 amp 3 Errors in 3 of 11 Checks BE Cell 1ab3 3 Errors 1 Check min spacing metal2 1 Error 01 Check min ext oxide poly 1 Error p This displays additional information about the rule itself 14 Read the contents of the Checktext window What is the rule specification Interesting side note what is the name of the rule file Is that the name of the rule file you specified Why do you think Calibre Interactive changed the name of your rule file This is not obvious You may need to look this up in the documentation HINT Look in the Calibre Verification User s Manual and search for rule Next you will highlight the error in the layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 55 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 15 16 17 3 56 Move the layout Window so you can view both RVE and the Layout Viewer DESIGNrev at the same time Select the 01 below the Checkmin_poly_width error Choose H from the toolbar The layout viewer pans and zooms into the display to highlight the Menene az Z BU ZR I LAG a1720 a2311 Notice that the error is centered in the display It is also in an empty area of the display This indicates that it is inside cell a1720 You ran the DRC check in hierarchical mode why do you think the error appears in the top cell lab3 in the reports Using Calibre
137. KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ckckckckckckokok ck ckckckckckckck ck kk k k k k kk k kkkkkk k INCORRECT OBJECTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LEGEND Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 17 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples ne Naming Error same layout name found in source circuit but object was matched otherwise kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk INCORRECT NETS DISC LAYOUT NAME ne SOURCE NAME kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk 1 Net C0 303 375 169 000 CO N 69 Step Five Notice in passing that the sole discrepancy is an INCORRECT NET as you might expect Proceed to Step Six below Step Seven After Checking the INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section below you know that this report is telling you that a single net C0 in the layout appears to match two nets C0 and N 69 in the source If you will recall the extraction warning at the top regarding net labels you will see that the layout labels that you were warned about match the source net names It appears that the labels were placed correctly and that this error is a short circuit between two nets in the layout You may now go to the interactive Calibre debugging environment to find the problem that you now know is a short circuit FR IO k k ke k k e kk che kk k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k I k k k k k k k k k k
138. Lab Information In this lab you will Find swapped pins Trace properties Et 9 29 Using Calibre Device Recognition Notes 9 28 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Lab Device Recognition Introduction In the lab with the power ground short you already experienced that Calibre cannot recognize gates without proper Power and Ground connections In this lab you will experiment with two other aspects of device recognition pin swapping and property tracing List of Exercises Exercise 9 1 Find a Pin Swap Discrepancy Exercise 9 2 Property Tracing Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 29 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Exercise 9 1 Find a Pin Swap Discrepancy In this lab you will find a swapped pin 1 Change to the lab9 directory 2 List the files in the directory You should see the files cell file lab9 rules lab9 trace rules golden rules lab9 source spi lab9 trace source spi golden rules trace lab9 trace gds lab9a gds layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev 4 Open lab9a gds 5 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 6 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab9 7 Choose New Runset 8 Enter the following Inputs
139. Layer Properties dialog box 7 Select the layer props txt file 8 Choose OPEN to execute the dialog box This loads the layer properties 1 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction The DESIGNrev window should look similar to below Select Mode Options Calibre DESIGNrev y Aly lt gy Y Z All Back Furt Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch bookmarks a layouts W ref W poly edge 4 vrix W text Layers lt lt lt 459 000 480 401 gt Layers Layout lab1 gds Cell tabt Depth O Grid off 1 500 19 401 gt In a later exercise you will review how to work in the DESIGNrev environment for now you are ready to launch Calibre Interactive Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 27 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Exercise 1 2 Launch Calibre DRC and LVS Interactive In this exercise you will launch Calibre DRC Interactive from within the layout viewer You will briefly review the Calibre Interactive LVS application window You will then load a runset containing all the information required for a DRC run You will then review all the various menus and options available from Calibre Interactive 1 From DESIGNrev choose Menu Tools gt Calibre Interactive This opens the Calibre Interactive Server dialog box 2 Display the Server tab Calibre Interactive Tools Server Socket Number 9189 Default Run Cancel L NOTE U
140. Layout data Hierarchical Flat or Calibre CB Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist or Netlist Extraction Layout Files Import layout database from layout viewer Primary Cell 9 30 Hierarchical Layout vs Netlist lab9a gds Unselected lab9 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Layout Netlist lab9a layout spi 9 Enter the following Input Netlist data Netlist Files lab9 source spi Import netlist from schematic viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab9 10 Enter the following Input HCells data Match cells by name automatch Selected Use H Cells list from file Selected filename cell file 11 Enter the following Rules data Calibre LVS Rules File lab9 rules Calibre LVS Run Directory 12 Enter the following Outputs Report SVDB data LVS Report File lab9 lvs report View Report after LVS finishes Selected Create SVDB Database Selected Start RVE after LVS finishes Selected Generate data for xCalibre Unselected Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data Unselected SVDB Directory svdb Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 31 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 13 Run LVS If you get a message box asking to overwrite layout file lab9a gds i cancel the message box and return to the Input Menu Note button Layout tab Make sure Import layout database from layout viewer is unselected then try running LVS again What are your results What c
141. Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Resolving a Pin Swap Discrepancy Resolving a Pin Swap Discrepancy Correct the discrepancy in the layout editor e Use LVS RVE to cross probe into source netlist and layout netlist e UseLVS RVE to highlight the problem nets e Change the connections in the Layout OR Add LVS RECOGNIZE GATES ALL SIMPLE specification to the rule file 9 26 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 9 25 Module 9 Device Recognition What Types of Errors Occur if a Contact is Misplaced What Types of Errors Occur if a Contact is Misplaced Connectivity errors Incorrect Nets Instance errors Incorrect Instances Similar discrepancies as a short or open p CROCO n 7 EL rH FA 7 Fl 7 e 7772 Cig ec CALI MEM zA el ij N CRIES a ray Ex SS CS AM Lvs Results Designs Don t Match BE tab5a lab5a 80 Discrepancies Incorrect Nets 50 Discrepancies Incorrect Instances 30 Discrepancies Detailed Instance Connections c SOS NNT t E a A a OROORO PRO Fs 8 Nl E DOOOOQOQOQOG US AETA SE P XE a E ASS RS l COBO BOA a sem Tk NN N ri EGOIN VERG OD EI 1 Via eps 2 Ze 27 A i 9 27 Using Calibre Device R
142. NA ND 180 MN3 ND 180 MN2 ND 180 MN1 ND 180 MP4 ND 180 MP3 ND 180 MP2 ND 180 MP1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SUMMARY kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Total CPU Time 3 67 Total Elapsed Time 4 42851 Report 3 Extraction Errors and Warnings for cell LVS ONLINE layout M foo 4 WARNING Short circuit Different names on one net Net Id 63 1 name CO at location 441 5 6 on layer 10 metal2 2 name N 69 at location 291 53 on layer 10 metal2 The name CO was assigned to the net Step One Notice this connectivity extraction warning Right away you know that something is strange about the layout It could be one of the labels is a mistake and Calibre just happened to pick the right label The circuit could still come out correct with this problem However its always a good idea to look at those labels at the given locations and make certain they are placed correctly on the correct layers over the correct polygons with the correct values In this case the problem will turn out to be fairly obvious but in more complex cases it is always best to investigate these warnings before expending too much effort in debugging the LVS reports THETHHHUUE RATHER E H E HH HERB HH REE HR HH RE HHH HARPER HHH REE A 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples 1H CALIBRE HH LVS REPORT H
143. Now that you have thought about the various options for the layout you are ready to enter more data 14 Choose the Netlist tab 7 50 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 15 Enter lab7a_source spi as the Netlist File 16 Select SPICE as the Netlist Format 17 Make sure Import netlist from schematic viewer is unselected 18 Enter lab7a as the Primary Cell The dialog box should look similar to below Calibre Interactive LVS user sallyw training using_calbr_v_work Hle Transcript Setup Help Rules Outputs Run Control Transcript Hierarchical Hat Calibre CB Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist Netlist Extraction Layout Netist H Cells Files jlab7a_source spi gt ccc View Netlist Format 9 SPICE Verilog Run LVS Start RVE Import netlist from schematic viewer Primary Cell lab7a an 19 Choose the HCells tab 20 Select Match cells by name automatch 21 Unselect Use H Cells list from file Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 51 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts The Calibre Interactive LVS window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive LVS Hle Transcript Setup Rules Hierarchical Hat Calibre CB Inputs Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist Netlist Extraction Outputs Run Control Layout Netlist Hoel
144. OUT CELL SOURCE CELL al1220 NAND2 1 a1230 MUX2 al1240 NOR2 1 a1310 A1310 al620 A1620 al720 A1720 a2311 A2311 lab5 top cell Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Select Cell Correspondence How to Select Cell Correspondence Calibre Inte 7 36 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 35 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Aid for Hcell File Creation Query Server Aid for Hcell File Creation Query Server Whatis the Query Server Command line driven Access results database information Response to queries Examples list of cells in layout design list of devices attached to a net list of nets connected to a device e Launch from the command line calibre query results database top cell What can the Query Server do to help with Hcell file creation or maintenance e Automatically generate complete Hcell file e Assist with intelligent or selective creation of Hcell file e Automatically create Hcell file meeting a savings threshold 7 37 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Useful Query Server commands quit Exits the Query Server and returns to the prompt help commands quick listing of all commands available from the Query Server response file f
145. RISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND 03 97 U S Government Restricted Rights The SOFTWARE and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are commercial computer software provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement provided with the software pursuant to DFARS 227 7202 3 a or as set forth in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor manufacturer is Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S W Boeckman Road Wilsonville Oregon 97070 7777 A complete list of trademark names appears in a separate Trademark Information document This is an unpublished work of Mentor Graphics Corporation Part Number 707235 Trademark Information The following are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation 3D Design ABIST Arithmetic BIST Accelerated Technology AccuPARTner AccuParts AccuSim ADEPT ADVance ADVance MS ADVance RFIC AMPLE Analog Analyst Analog Station Ares ART grid ArtRouter ARTshape ASICPlan ASIC Vector Interfaces Aspire AuthEx press AutoActive AutoCells AutoDissolve AutoFilter AutoFlow AutoLib AutoLinea
146. SII Output from Calibre Normally Calibre writes DRC results to an ASCII file for subsequent display with RVE Alternately you can instruct Calibre to write DRC results to a specific file in GDSII format Specify the output on a per rulecheck basis via the DRC CHECK MAP statement DRC CHECK MAP rule check GDSII layer datatype filename Provide a DRC CHECK MAP statement for every rule if the DRC RESULTS DATABASE statement specifies GDSII as the format for all DRC output Additional DRC CHECK MAP options are available consult the SVRF Manual Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Examples Generating GDSII Output from Calibre Examples Generating GDSII Output from Calibre Example 1 Grow all metal1 by 0 1u and save the result as GDS data Grow Metall Grow metall by 0 1u SIZE metall BY 0 1 j DRC CHECK MAP Grow Metall GDSII 21 0 mask grown_m1 gds Example 2 Output all metal shapes in net RESET for a GDS plot LAYER metal metall metal2 metal3 Define layer set metal Plot RESET Output all metal shapes belonging to the RESET net NET metal RESET j DRC CHECK MAP Plot RESET GDSII 1 0 plots RESET gds 10 12 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 11 June 2004 Module 10 Additional T
147. Setup Rules 4 Hierarchical Calibre CB Inputs Layout Outputs Run Control Transcript mess cma port layout database from layout viewer Primary Cell lab3 J Check area Eu I m4 Notice that the Files text is in red but the Inputs tab is green This indicates that the lab3_fixed gds file does not currently exist but Calibre has enough information to perform a DRC run When you selected the Import layout database from layout viewer option you instructed Calibre to create the GDSII file before it starts the actual verification 4 Choose Transcript to display the transcript You are now ready to run DRC on the new data 5 Choose Run DRC 3 70 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What results do you expect 6 Use the Transcript Summary Report and RVE to check your results What results did you get If you have any errors other than the expected one you may want to go back and try to fix the discrepancies again If this is the case you will get a message asking if it is OK to overwrite the lab3_fixed gds file when you re run the DRC to check your results This concludes Lab 3 You may try to fix the other error on your own and re run DRC When you are finished please exit all Calibre windows RVE Summary Report Calibre Interactive and the layout viewer so
148. Shorts Using RVE Cont Display the Source and Layout netlists E Top Network El Subckts 9 a9500 21720 al620 al230 a2311 al240 al220 21310 lab5a M1 34 2 2 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 fA ENDS n SUBCKT labSa N 62 EP IP 419 FDC 280 X8 VSS VDD 51 50 a1310 T 24500 1 X9 VSS VDD 9 3 6 a1220 T 24500 2 X10 VSS VDD 8 4 7 a1220 T 24500 X11 VSS VDD 50 11 9 8 5 a1240 ST X17 VSS VDD 52 51 10 a1220 T 405 X21 VSS 3 VDD 7 4 a2311 ST 48500 X26 VSS VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56 X29 VSS VDD 15 5 8 9 23 a1240 T X30 VSS VDD 10 15 13 a1220 T 885 x40 VSS VDD 53 17 54 a1220 T 112 X41 VSS VDD 11 21 3 12 16 21240 X44 VSS 6 VDD 22 19 SS a1620 T 9 X48 VSS 20 VDD 18 3 a2311 T 1045 X54 VSS VDD 54 13 20 a1220 T 136 x60 VSS 12 VDD 55 19 a2311 T 128 X61 VSS VDD 23 3 12 16 24 a1240 X66 VSS VDD 17 25 57 a1220 T 160 X73 VSS 57 VDD 3 29 a2311 T 1525 X78 VSS VDD 56 27 26 a1220 T 184 X80 VSS VDD 32 12 16 24 a1230 T X83 VSS VDD 58 28 30 a1220 T 176 X87 VSS VDD 26 13 31 a1220 ST 208 X94 VSS 31 VDD 58 12 a2311 T 200 X95 VSS 14 VDD 28 33 35 a1620 ST X97 VSS VDD 18 22 36 32 a1230 T X98 VSS VDD 27 25 34 a1220 T 232 X113 VSS 16 VDD 35 33 a2311 T 23 Xii4 VSS VDD 59 38 37 a1220 T 25 eS lab5a Une 89 Col IT 8 14 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 El Top Netwoi A E
149. Subckts labSa ENDS 9 Source Netlis Owput Files Rules File Layout Netlis Extraction Report LYS Repot ded kd kd ede SUBCKT lpb5a M Ml M2 M3 M4 N 64 EP 0 IP 402 FDC 280 VSS 4 2 VSS n L 1 4 5 VSS VSS n VSS 6 4 VSS n VDD 4 2 VDD p Eu 1 75e 06 W t 5e 07 W 2e L 1310 T 2450 10 a1220 T 24 11 a1220 T 24t 2 13 12 9 a1240 4 14 a1220 T 4 7 8 a2311 T 485C 7 9 16 18 21230 T 9 17 12 13 26 a1240 20 56 55 17 17 14 IC 24 15 7 16 19 a1240 10 VDD 25 22 57 a1620 1 VDD 21 23 7 a2311 T 10 VDD 27 59 20 17 23 56 IC VDD 57 16 22 a2311 T 1 VDD 7 26 16 19 2 a1240 VDD 7 59 31 a2311 T 15 VDD 17 33 28 29 28 58 IC VDD 16 34 19 2 a1230 T VDD 30 60 32 a1220 ST 1 VDD 60 33 16 32311 ST 2l 18 VDD 30 35 37 al620 9 cor aati m mW m a n Winn wee wnn 95 91 38 A a19AN AEE fasa ime 4 Col 10 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 8 13 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Using RVE Cont Tracking Shorts Using RVE Cont Highlight nets from Discrepancy report as a starting point Net 13 in source and Net 17 in layout Source Netlist user sallyw calibre usi il Layout Netlist user sallyw calibre us Hle Select View Go Windows Hle Select View Go Windows 7 amp P E Top Network X26 VSS VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56 E Subckts X29 VSS VDD 15 5 8 9 23 31240 T WSS VDD 15 52 13 12 9
150. Transcripts mme CALIBRE HDB QUERY SERVER EXECUTIVE MODULE FESTE OK Ready to serve netlist automatch on netlist placementmatch on netlist read query rules Initializing LVS O O READING layout Layout READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 0 MALLOC 1 1 1 READING source A Source READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 0 MALLOC 1 1 1 Identifying CORRESPONDING cells CORRESPONDING Cells Identified CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Adding GLOBAL elements GLOBAL elements added CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME O Resolving DEEP SHORTS DEEP SHORTS resolved CPU TIME ll eo ll eo REAL TIME Resolving HIGH SHORTS HIGH SHORTS resolved CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME O Deleting TRIVIAL PINS TRIVIAL PINS deleted CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 OK netlist select hcells C 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts CALIBRE LVS Total Hier Saved Total Potential Layout Source Instance Count By This Savings Remaining Cell Cell Layout Source Cell So Far Savings Name Name 280 280 0 0 0 0 68 200 200 29 29 55 a2311 s2311 138 138 3 51 35 a1220 s1220 118 118 14 58 24 a1240 s1240 Resulting Hcell File File basic_hcells contains the following lines a2311 82311 a1220 s1220 a1240 s1240 It is ready to be used as an Hcell file with no additional editing required Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 C 3
151. Using Calibre with DESIGNrev Student Workbook May 2006 Mentor raphics G Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2004 All rights reserved This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation and may not be duplicated in whole or in part in any form without written consent from Mentor Graphics In accepting this document the recipient agrees to make every reasonable effort to prevent the unauthorized use of this information This document is for information and instruction purposes Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS A
152. Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 45 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 15 16 17 18 3 46 This displays the Rules information needed for a DRC run Calibre Interactive DRC Enter golden rules in the Calibre DRC Rules File text box Make sure the text turns green indicating this is an acceptable file Choose Load to load the rule file Enter or leave in the Calibre DRC Run Directory Remove the quotes This will place all the resulting files in the current directory HOME using calbr lab3 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC The dialog box should now look similar to the one illustrated below Again you may have the full path names in the text boxes Calibre Interactive DRC 19 Choose the Outputs Menu Button Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 47 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 20 PA 22 23 24 25 26 3 48 This displays the dialog box where you will set the names of the output files Calibre Interactive DRC jab3 drc results Enter lab3 db as the DRC Results Database filename Select ASCII as its format Select Start RVE after DRC Finishes Select Write DRC Summary Report File Enter drc_report as the DRC Summary Report filename Select Replace File Select View summary report after DRC finishes In summary you are creating files lab3 db the DRC Results Database and drc report the DRC Summary Report Yo
153. VDD 7 4 a2311 T 48500 355000 0 MS 4 6 52 VDD p L 7 Se 07 W 2e 05 X 334 X26 VSS VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56500 2290 X14 VSS VDD 53 54 a1310 T 24500 17000 C X29 VSS VDD 15 5 8 9 23 a1240 T 64500 11 X15 VSS VDD 7 13 10 a1220 ST 24500 2290 X30 VSS VDD 10 15 13 41220 T 88500 17000 X16 VSS VDD 8 12 11 a1220 T 24500 3550C X40 VSS VDD 53 17 54 a1220 ST 112500 1700 X17 VSS VDD 15 53 13 12 9 a1240 T 6450C X41 VSS VDD 11 21 3 12 16 a1240 T 128500 X23 WSS VDD 54 55 14 a1220 T 40500 170C X44 VSS 6 VDD 22 19 55 a1620 ST 96500 355 AO ucc 0n unn 10 2 20211 em inatnn 110nni llabza Lie 78 ttttttttttttttttttttttttititttttttttttt db RR EEREREEREE EE EE EE EE EE EE EA W i Top Network 45 Click on instance X9 in the Source netlist kd Rand RR RR SUBCKT lab7a N 62 EP 0 IP 419 FDC 280 X8 VSS VDD 51 50 a1310 T 24500 17000 0 0 VSS VDD 9 3 6 a1220 T 24500 229000 0 7 58 gt gt x10 x11 X17 X21 X26 x29 x30 x40 X41 x44 vao VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS ucc VDD 8 4 7 a1220 T 24500 355000 0 VDD 50 11 9 8 5 a1240 T 64500 11 VDD 52 51 10 a1220 T 40500 17000 3 VDD 7 4 a2311 T 48500 355000 0 VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56500 2290 VDD 15 5 8 9 23 a1240 T 64500 11 VDD 10 15 13 31220 T 88500 17000 VDD 53 17 54 a1220 T 112500 1700 VDD 11 21 3 12 16 a1240 T 128500 6 VDD 22 19 55 a1620 T 96500 355 On tmn 10 2 402414 em_inacnn 110nni mo M1 M2 M3 M4 MS N 8 EP 8
154. VS Options Choose the Supply tab Change the following data Abort LVS on power ground net errors Selected Power net names VDD Ground net names VSS Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens You selected to have LVS abort a run when it encountered a power ground problem This is a good option to have as a default setting It not only alerts you immediately that there is a supply problem it also prevents you from wasting time on a long LVS run that has such a basic problem Run LVS Look at the LVS Report What are the results Notice this is different from just Incorrect The comparison was not even done 10 Close the RVE and LVS Report windows 11 In Calibre Interactive change the following LVS Options Supply data Abort LVS on power ground net errors Unselected Power net names lt blank gt Ground net names lt blank gt 12 Run LVS again Now what kind of results do you have 13 Highlight the discrepancy in lab8 Did you find it 14 Erase the highlights 15 Try highlighting the discrepancy from one of the subcircuits Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 67 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Any luck narrowing down the problem A straight LVS run is just not adequate for finding a short in a power ground or any very large net for that matter 16 Erase all highlights 17 Close the LVS Report Window and the RVE window
155. Y 5 WIDEM1 SIZE A BY 5 B SIZE WIDEM1 BY 40 PADM1 SIZE B BY 40 Best WIDEM1 SIZE M1 BY 5 UNDEROVER PADM1 SIZE WIDEM1 BY 40 UNDEROVER 2 14 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Including Other Rule Files Including Other Rule Files Why would I have more than one rule file e Should not edit golden rule file from the factory e Want to check beyond factory spec INCLUDE statement allows you to use rules from the factory and include your own checks in one file For example SOURCE PATH D3 spi LAYOUT PATH D3 gds LVS REPORT lvs rpt MASK SVDB DIRECTORY svdb QUERY My Rule 1 INCLUDE factory ruleset 1 1 2 15 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 2 13 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What Does it Mean that Calibre is an Edge Based Tool What Does it Mean that Calibre is an Edge Based Tool Calibre DRC uses edges not polygons Edges with the violation highlight in the layout 2 16 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Why Does Calibre Only Highligh
156. a1240 a9500 X30 VSS VDD 10 15 fi al220 T 885 53 54 14 a1220 T 4 Mec X40 VSS VDD 53 17 5451220 ST 112 11 7 8 a2311 T 485 16 a1240 BI 7 9 16 18 a1230 T B a1620 1620 T 9 ME 9 Hj 12 13 26 a1240 ma1230 T 1045 ge 56 55 14 It a2311 al620 2 a2311 T 10 eei E 23 56 It a1220 82311 T 1 21310 16 19 2 a1240 50 31 a2311 T 15 s jj 33 28 29 28 58 I z 34 19 2 a1230 T 60 32 a1220 T l 33 16 a2311 T 2 30 35 37 al620 1 7 13 10 a1220 T 24 VSS VDD 8 12 11 a1220 T 245 8 15 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts to the Layout Viewer Tracking Shorts to the Layout Viewer Net 17 in layout highlights This is a large net Will need more information to narrow down the short location 8 16 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 15 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Display Next Discrepancy Tracking Shorts Display Next Discrepancy From RVE display next discrepancy lab5a flabSa Discrepancy 2 Incorrect Nets a LAYOUT NAME ORAE ne SOURCE NAME i HEREREEE AE EEE ERE kk kd ko kdo kh kd khe mi
157. ab7a 14 Close the Net 27 in lab7a by using the pull down menu from the upper left corner This returns you to the Query Layout Nets in lab7a dialog box Notice that many of the highlighting options available from the previous dialog box are also available from this one 7 68 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Experiment highlighting net 27 using the various options from the Query Layout Nets in lab7a dialog box When you are finished erase all highlights This dialog box has one more feature that you may find useful for trouble shooting Choose Net by Location The follow info box appears Get Layout Location al Ci Please click at a location in cell lab7a in the layout viewer Cancel uz Click over any net of interest in the layout viewer Notice that the net number automatically appears in the Layout Net text box If you want you may experiment by finding information on this net When you are finished choose Close to exit the Query Layout Nets in lab7a dialog box Erase any highlights Next you are going to query a layout device First you need to understand what Calibre defines as a device Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 69 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Is a NAND gate a device Is an NMOS transistor a device How can you tell what Calibre defines as a device Hint rule file
158. action Report Which non functional text is Calibre warning about Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 39 June 2004 Module 5 Texting 10 11 12 13 14 Which cells contain this text Find and remove all the non functional text from the layout Be careful not to remove the functional text like VDD and VSS Even though there are about 55 total errors reported you will not i need to fix 55 text instances Fixing one instance of a cell will fix Note all instances of that cell the power of hierarchy When you are ready to test your work close all RVE windows Return to the Calibre Interactive window Choose the Inputs menu button Change the Layout File from lab5d gds to lab5d_fixed gds Select the Import layout database from layout viewer option By making these two changes you are loading your changes directly from the layout viewer without requiring that you save the file as GDSII first You are also creating a new GDSII so you are not overwriting your existing file Run LVS again Any texting problems Hint Look at the Extraction Report When you are finished with this lab close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC LVS RVE and Summary Report 5 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Explain how Calibre establishes connec
159. alibre LVS Transcript Calibre LVS Report File Calibre LVS Results Database 7 21 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 19 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Read the LVS Transcript How to Read the LVS Transcript View using Calibre Interactive Identifies e Individual phases of LVS execution Compilation of the rule file Translation and transformation of the source and layout cells Generation of the output files e Execution statistics like Calibre DRC e Connectivity extraction errors e Warnings Texting problems Stamping errors Provides clues if LVS terminates before completion 7 22 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Transcript in the Calibre Interactive Window Transcript in the Calibre Interactive Window Calibre Interactive LVS user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 lab 7 23 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 21 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Read the LVS Report File How to Read the LVS Report File LVS generates the report in ASCII format Reportis readable either with an ASCII editor or with Calibre RVE Reportlists discr
160. alibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Exercise 6 4 Use SCONNECT to Find Soft Connection Errors In the exercise you will re run LVS on the layout with a soft connection error again using a method that will allow you to find the exact soft connection from within LVS l 2 Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active Load runset lab6 sconnect runset Menu File gt Load Runset Load the rule file View the rule file Find the tvo SCONNECT statements What are the SCONNECT statements doing Leave the rule file open Run LVS What are your results In order to get any information about soft connections using this statement you need to have LVS perform a soft check and then report on the soft check results Write a rule statement that highlights upper layer geometries involved in soft connections to nsub Use the SVRF Manual and or look back through the lecture Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 33 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 10 11 12 13 6 34 Answer Write a rule statement that highlights upper layer geometries involved in soft connections to pwell Answer Add these two statements to the rule file Save the rule file Now that you have written the rules you need to set Calibre to report Softchecks to return any results Display the LVS Options May need to make the LVS Options available using Menu Setup gt LVS Options
161. alibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Summary Tracking Shorts Summary Lookat LVS Report first e Net number discrepancy e nets in Source gt nets in Layout e Two Source nets matched to one Layout net Use RVE Display first discrepancy Display source netlist Display layout netlist Highlight net information from discrepancies one at a time Check highlighted nets in layout for obvious problems Look for patterns in the netlist to narrow down the short location Correct the problem Re run LVS to check the correction 8 24 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 23 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens What Happens if there are Both Shorts and Opens What Happens if there are Both Shorts and Opens Problem not as obvious Reported as Connectivity errors LVS Report File lvs report2 File Edit Options Windows RULE FILE golden rules CREATION TIME Sun Feb 16 13 00 24 2003 CURRENT DIRECTORY fuser sallyw calibre using_calbr labS USER NAME sallyw CALIBRE VERSION v9 1 9 3 Fri Dec 13 15 05 27 PST 2002 OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS HHRFEARRR RARER REE INCORRECT PREFER ER REPRE REPRE Error Different numbers of instances Error Connectivity errors Warning Ambiguity points were found and resolv
162. ames ee ee ee ek OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HHHHHH HHH HHH HHH HH HE INCORRECT god HHHHHH HHH HHH HHH HH Error Different numbers of nets see below Error Different numbers of instances see below Step Three The comparison result is INCORRECT The errors are generally described as differing numbers of nets and instances Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 19 Nets 356 154 Instances 140 140 mn 4 pins 140 140 mp 4 pins Total Inst 280 280 Step Four Note that when the databases were initially read in Calibre Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 5 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples recognized the same kinds of Instances and the same numbers of instances NUMBERS OF OBJECTS AFTER TRANSFORMATION Layout Source Component Type Ports 16 16 Nets 74 he Instances 19 0 mn 4 pins 9 0 mp 4 pins 25 25 NAND2 3 pins 6 7 INV 2 pins 4 10 AOI 2 1 4 pins 5 5 NAND3 4 pins 5 11 NOR2 3 pins 2 4 NAND4 5 pins 6 0 SPUP 2 1 4 pins 6 0 SUP2 3 pins 2 0 SMN4 6 pins 6 0 SMN2 4 pins Total Inst 95 62 Step Five However after TRANSFORMATION Calibre appears to be very confused with many different logic gate counts and many logic gates recognized in the layout that don t appear in the source at all Also notice that the number of nets after transformation is very close
163. amples 81 SPUP 2 1 missing gate Transistors 195 173 625 169 000 189 157 625 169 000 192 165 625 169 000 82 SUP2 missing gate Transistors 198 181 625 169 000 201 189 625 169 000 83 SPUP 2 1 missing gate Transistors 212 221 625 169 000 206 205 625 169 000 208 213 625 169 000 84 SPUP 2 1 missing gate Transistors 266 365 625 169 000 259 349 625 169 000 262 357 625 169 000 85 SUP2 missing gate Transistors 216 229 625 169 000 218 237 625 169 000 86 SPUP 2 1 missing gate Transistors 230 269 625 169 000 224 253 625 169 000 227 261 625 169 000 87 SUP2 missing gate Transistors 234 277 625 169 000 237 285 625 169 000 88 SPUP 2 1 missing gate Transistors 249 317 625 169 000 243 301 625 169 000 247 309 625 169 000 89 SUP2 missing gate Transistors 252 325 625 169 000 255 333 625 169 000 90 SUP2 missing gate Transistors 270 373 625 169 000 273 381 625 169 000 91 SMN4 missing gate Transistors 3 33 875 132 000 11 57 875 132 000 8 49 875 132 000 6 41 875 132 000 A 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples 92 SMNA Transistors 14 69 875 132 000 24 93 875 132 000 22 85 875 132 000 18 77 875 132 000 missing gate 93 SMN2 Transistors 30 109 875 132 000 33 117 875 132 000 missing gate 94 SMN2 Transistors 49 157 875 132 000 52 165
164. and document the number of discrepancies found 2 Make the DRC Summary window active by selecting it Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 37 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 2 38 3 Scroll down to the end of the report to display the RULECHECK RESULTS STATISTICS section The report window should look similar to below DRC Summary Report a1220 drc summary Bl x File Edit Options Windows Geometry Flagging Excluded Cells CheckText Mapping Layers Keep Empty Checks ACUTE NO SKEW NO OFFGRID NO NONSIMPLE POLYGON NO NONSIMPLE PATH NO COMMENT TEXT RULE FILE INFORMATION MEMORY BASED ORIGINAL LAYER STATISTICS LAYER oxide TOTAL Original LAYER poly TOTAL Original LAYER metall TOTAL Original LAYER metal2 TOTAL Original LAYER contact TOTAL Original LAYER pwell RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK RULECHECK TOTAL CPU Original min poly width min metall width min metal2 width min contact width min oxide spacing min pwell spacing min spacing metall min spacing metal2 metall enclose cont min ext oxide poly Time TOTAL REAL Time TOTAL Original Layer Geometries TOTAL DRC TOTAL DRC RuleChecks Executed Results Generated Geometry Count Geometry Count Geometry Count Geometry Count Geometry Count Geometry Count Result Result Result Result Resu
165. and ground net Rule file specifications Use LVS ISOLATE SHORTS method to highlight shorts as DRC violations covered later in this lecture or debug like a regular short 8 30 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 29 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Using Special Tools Targeting Power and Ground Nets Using Special Tools Targeting Power and Ground Nets Calibre Interactive LVS LVS ABORT ON Ele Transcript Setup SUPPLY ERROR e Stops all LVS W Abort LVS on power ground net errors d comparisons IT a problem is Power net names VDD encountered with either the Gmmdmtmmes vs id power or ground Run Lvs e Quick check for LVS Report File lab5 power lvs report H Edit Options Windows a supply problem OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS GESSSSSSSS 4G HERE E BE Lvs Results Designs Don t Match E i ddr lab5a lab5a 0 Discrepancies E JAANE Power or ground net missing JSR SEES oT Sn A A aT EE OA ENTE jc a UU N Eudt Rows ane Gol faa 8 31 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Identifying Power Ground Texting Problems Identifying Power Ground Texting Problems Incorrectly named power ground nets
166. ar net 6 Net 3 28 250 123 280 00000 no similar net 3 Net N 195 31 375 280 000 00000000 no similar net 8 Net N 124 31 375 406 000 50000 no similar net C Net N 176 99 375 280 000 00000 no similar net 10 Net N 187 71 375 169 000 00000000 no similar net 11 Net N 199 139 375 280 0000 no similar net 12 Net N 263 239 375 406 000 0000 no similar net 13 Net N 115 210 750 280 000 00000 no similar net 14 Net N 54 111 375 169 000 5000000000 no similar net 35 Net 27 143 375 169 000 000000 no similar net 16 Net N 51 189 375 169 000 000000 no similar net ax 17 Net N 118 266 750 280 000 00 no similar net 18 Net 37 191 375 169 000 0000000 no similar net 19 Net N 84 183 375 406 000 00000 no similar net 20 Net N 46 207 375 169 000 00000 no similar net 21 Net N 45 351 375 169 000 000000 s no similar net 22 Net 47 239 375 169 000 000000000 no similar net 23 Net N 68 255 375 169 000 000 no similar net 24 Net 60 287 375 169 000 000000 no similar net Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples 169 000 no similar net 69 000 no similar net 280 000 no similar net 69 000 no similar net 69 000 no similar net 50 no similar ne t N 51 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
167. at circuitry Also there are the man hours to keep the Hcell file up to date with the names of the cell Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 31 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Due to the Calibre overhead considerations it also may not be to your advantage to use the automatch option when you have a design with a large number of individual cells It is more appropriate in the case of a design with a few number of different cells that are used repeatedly These are trade offs you need to weigh as a user 7 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Creating the Hcell Correspondence File Creating the Hcell Correspondence File Create the file with an ASCII editor Insert one cell per line in the form layout name source name Including the top level cell is not necessary Specifying 1 to n or n to 1 correspondence is permissible Enter comments by starting a line with Do not use trailing comments LVS H treats cell names as case insensitive LVS H issues a warning for cell names not found 7 34 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 33 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Example Hcell Correspondence File 7 35 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Notes 7 34 Example Hcell Correspondence File CELL FILE HCELL FILE PROJECT NAME mydesign LAY
168. ation is again highlighted and now the edit window has been zoomed in such that the extent of the highlight bars fills half of the edit window width Calibre DESIGNrev ial xl File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Help Z f x cz lw uw Z All Back fort Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch a bookmarks A layouts wo none best vy ref v poly w edge vrix 9 text Layers lt lt lt 16 382 47 794 gt Hierarchy Show Hide 6 260 39 214 gt dx 0 000 dy 1 800 d 1 800 Layout a1220 gds Cel a1220 Depth O Grid off 21 Choose the Ruler icon in the layout editor Make sure Ruler Options are set to Manhattan and snap to grid 22 Use the Ruler to measure the spacing between the highlighted edges What is the measured spacing between the metal edges Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 43 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 44 What minimum spacing is required by the rule look in the CheckText frame In DESIGNrev select Menu Options gt Ruler This opens the Preferences dialog box In the Preferences box select ALL in the Clear Rulers section Choose OK in the Preferences dialog box In RVE click the Eraser icon to clear the highlights In RVE choose Menu File gt Exit Choose YES to confirm the exit Now we will allow tighter metall spacing by defining the Unix environmen
169. ayed out That is because you do not have a schematic If you were using either ICStation or Composer and had a schematic available you could crossprobe all the way back to the schematic The data for this class does not have a schematic at its source Enter X48 as the Source Instance Choose Instance Info What is corresponding layout instance Close the Instance X48 in lab7a dialog box Highlight the instance in the netlist and the layout Close the Query Source Instances in lab7a dialog box Erase any highlights You now have an introduction to the types of information available from the RVE toolbar Before going to the next exercise spend a little time exploring features that were not directly covered in this exercise When you are finished experimenting erase all highlights Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 75 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 48 Close the LVS RVE window and all netlist windows The Calibre Interactive L VS window should still be open 7 76 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Exercise 7 3 Hierarchical LVS and Hcells In this lab you will run another LVS this time with an error 1 Make the DESIGNrev window active 2 Open the GDSII file lab7b gds 3 Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active You should now have the Calibre Interactive LVS window open to Inputs 4 Enter the following Inputs Layout data Hierarchical Flat or Calibre C
170. ayer TEXT LAYER M2 TXT Define layer as a text layer LAYOUT TEXT CLOCK 10 5 16 8 M2 TXT NAND2 place text 5 8 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 7 June 2004 Module 5 Texting When to Use TEXT Placements When to Use TEXT Placements TEXT Objects e Can edit overwrite existing database text e Attach only to top level cell using top cell coordinates e Do not obey TEXT LAYER or TEXT DEPTH statements Example TEXT RESET 20 0 12 5 METALI 5 9 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Specify Which Layers are Valid Text Layers How to Specify Which Layers are Valid Text Layers To designate a layer to contain free standing text objects e TEXT LAYER layerN e Example LAYER m txt 50 assign label m txt to layer 50 TEXT LAYER m txt m txt contains text objects To designate a layer to contain port text objects e PORT LAYER TEXT layerN e Example LAYER p txt 51 assign label p txt to layer 50 PORT LAYER TEXT p txt p txt contains port text 5 10 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Filter Unwanted Text Objects How to Filter Unwanted Text Objects Specify hierarchical depth for text recognitio
171. ayout vs Netlist Enter lab7a gds as the Layout file Make sure Import layout database from layout viewer is unselected Enter lab7a as the primary cell Enter lab7a_layout net as the layout netlist Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts The window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive LVS EE I File Transcript Setup Help Rules Hierarchical Hat Calibre CB Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist Netlist Extraction Layout Netlist HCelts nes finvagts Jil Import layout database from layout viewer Primary Cell llabza Layout Netlist llab7a layout net cea Inputs Outputs Run Control Transcript Before you enter information for the next tab answer the following questions about your selections You selected Layout vs Netlist What information did you need to provide for the layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 49 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Do all these files have to exist before the Calibre LVS run Explain What do you expect Calibre LVS to do before the actual LVS comparison What if you select Netlist vs Netlist what layout information would Calibre LVS need Do all these files have to exist before the Calibre LVS run Explain Where would the layout netlist come from in this case What benefits exist for using this two step process
172. b lab5a Nets 16 and 42 should be connected in the layout 8 7 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Opens Using RVE Display Net in Layout Tracking Opens Using RVE Display Nets in Layout Display Net 16 and Net 42 by clicking on them in RVE Nets 16 and 42 should be connected in the layout IHE TENER Ki l There is an obvious break between these nets 8 8 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 7 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Opens Correct the Problem and Re run LVS Tracking Opens Correct the Problem and Re run LVS Correct the layout Save the layout File Viewer user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 lvs report Re run LVS sd tic ec ae LVS REPORT Li Li GEIEERSERSERNIEREEESERERNEREIERERISIERERERESIERIRESERISIERSE RISE BAHAR RH BH REPORT FILE NAME lvs report LAYOUT NAME lay net lab5a SOURCE NAME fuser sallyw calibre using calbr lab5 lab5a src spi RULE FILE lab5 rules CREATION TIME Fri Feb 7 09 16 33 2003 CURRENT DIRECTORY fuser sallyw calibre using calbr lab5 USER NAME sallyw CALIBRE VERSION v9 1 9 4 Thu Dec 19
173. ble 13 Add the psd layer to the CONNECT statement Place psd as the last layer in the list of layers connected to metall by contact 14 Save the file 15 Run LVS again Any problems This type of problem is not normally encountered The CONNECT statements are normally part of the golden rule file and not often edited Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 25 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity You may see these problems when you are defining new devices or trying to write rules to flag soft connections 16 Close the rule file 17 Close all Calibre windows except DESIGNrev 6 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Exercise 6 2 Use STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors In this exercise you will learn how to find soft connections using STAMP 1 Make DESIGNrev active 2 Open lab6b gds 3 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab6 4 Uselab6 stamp runset as the runset 5 Run LVS What are the results 6 Open the Layout and Source netlists 7 Display the Extraction Report What is the problem according to the Extraction Report What is the location What nets You have all the information you need to fix the problem right Not this time The location is just the lower left corner of the nsub layer which is very large Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 27 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity LVS just isn t very helpful for finding the exact location of the problem t
174. bleshooting an Open Exercise 8 2 Troubleshooting a Short Exercise 8 3 Troubleshooting a Circuit with both Shorts and Opens Exercise 8 4 Troubleshooting a Power to Ground Short Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 43 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Exercise 8 1 Troubleshooting an Open In this lab you will learn how to find and fix the simplest case of an open circuit on a non power supply net 1 Change to the lab8 directory 2 List the files in the directory You should see at a minimum the following 12 files cell file lab8 source spi lab8c gds golden rules lab8 supply rules lab8d gds golden rules supply lab8a gds layer props txt lab8 rules lab8b gds If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev 4 Open the GDSII file lab8a gds 5 Load the layer properties file layer_props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 6 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab8 7 Choose to create a new runset 8 44 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 8 Enter the following Inputs Layout data Hierarchical Flat or Calibre CB Hierarchical Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist or Netlist Extraction Layout vs Netlist Layout Files lab8a gds Import layout database from layout viewer Unselected Primary Cell lab8 Layout Netlist lab8a layout net
175. c DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Displaying the Error in the Layout Displaying the Error in the Layout Calibre RVE jumps to DESIGNrev and highlights the error 3 40 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 37 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Displaying Errors Hierarchically Displaying Errors Hierarchically Display errors at the top level of the hierarchy or at the level in the hierarchy where the error occurs in context Default is displaying at the top level of the hierarchy ILLA fae LLL S A uae NY Y Ni S S Y eh i SS NN d 3 42 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Displaying Errors in Context Displaying Errors in Context Choose from DRC Option Menu Output tab Output Area DRC Includes WZ i Er A nite Set RVE to view in context Menu Highlight gt Highlight in Context File Mew Highlight Setup i d I W Highlight in Context Skip Fixed Skip Waived Set Highlight Layers Clear Highlights FA Zoom To Last Highlight F5 Highlight Error z Highlight Range A Highlight All EE Exp
176. cation Environment COLsim Code lab CommLib CommLib BMC Concurrent Design Environment Connectivity Dataport Continuum Continuum Power Analyst CoreAlliance CoreBIST Core Builder Core Factory CTIntegrator DataCentric Model DataFusion Datapath Data Solvent dBUG Debug Detective DC Analyzer Deltacore Delta V Design Architect Design Architect IC Design Architect Elite Design Capture Design Exchange amp Design Manager Design Station DesignBook DesignView DesktopASIC Destination PCB Destiny RE DFTAdvisor DFTArchitect DFTInsight DMS DMS Xchange DxAnalog DxDataBook DxDesigner DxLibraryS tudio DxParts DXPDF Dx ViewOnly Dx VariantManager Direct System Verification DSV Documentation Station DSS Decision Support System Dx Analog DxData Manager DxDesigner DxEnterprise for Agile Dx Matrix DxViewDraw E3Lcable EDA Tech ForumEDT Eldo EldoNet ePartners EParts EPlanner eProduct Designer EProduct Services Empowering Solutions Engineer s Desktop EngineerView Enterprise Librarian ENRead ENWrite ESim Exemplar ExemplarLogic Expedition Explorer CAECO Layout Explorer Check Mate Explorer Datapath Explorer Lsim Explorer Lsim C Explorer Lsim S Explorer Ltime Explorer Schematic Explorer VHDL sim Ex pressl O EZwave FabLink Falcon Falcon Framework FastScan FastStart Fire First Pass Design Success First Pass Success Flex Sim FlexTest FDL Flow Definition Language FlowTabs F
177. cceesseeccessseeeeessseeeessseeecesseeeceens 2 22 Examples of Enclosure Checks emot oC ELE EE ERR onan 2 23 vi Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont What are Typical E VS Rules ied titre cete tut e EPI ge roD Het dote hens 2 24 Fundamental Ideas of Device Recognition ssssseeeee 2 25 Built In Device Definitions e ruo e REV d ee ee NE edat 2 26 CMOS Device Example i5 itt cre esi he EON Potter ets 2 27 What Other Types of Rules are There eo e ter sedet ees co 2 28 Lab Information saei a E duca eo c iE nei e De E aaa 2 29 ab Calibre Rules DUd orisii a a tvels 2 30 Exercise 2 1 Load a Design amp Prepare for DRC sssessssseeeeeeneenee 2 31 Exercise 2 RUM DRE 2b ome da I boo Ne eu atc a M aS 2 37 Exercise 2 3 Write Transistor Checks dasa cist e ca ee ede Ae Rene uitis aa distet dete 2 47 Module 3 logiae 3 1 ODJECHUVES NOST oc CHR cc 3 Whatis the DRE Process onis mtb od vede o uetus liaec NUR MEE TU RU EU M ERES 3 2 What Types of DRC Problems Can Calibre Find eeeessssessse 3 3 Example Exterior Spacing Problem sse 3 4 Example Interior Spacing Problem sseesese eene 3 5 Example Extension Spacing Problem ode eite EHE 3 6 Example Overlap of Polygons on Different Layers seseessssss 3 7 What Files Does a DRC Run Require sso me qud te ob emo eia eis 3 8 Calibre Output FI
178. cell contents during a LVS comparison Still checks external connections Allows you to run an LVS when the layout is partially complete a5000 7 30 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to use LVS BOX How to use LVS BOX Specification in the Rule File LVS BOX SOURCE LAYOUT SOURCE LAYOUT cellname e SOURCE LAYOUT Ignore in both the source and the layout default e SOURCE Only ignore these cells in the source LAYOUT Only ignore these cells in the layout e cellname Name of the cells you wish to treat as black boxes Example Ignore cells a1220 in both the layout and source LVS BOX a1220 7 31 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 7 29 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What is Automatic Cell Correspondence What is Automatic Cell Correspondence Hierarchical analysis requires the identification of corresponding cells between the source and layout LVS H automatically matches cells in the source and layout with the same name when invoked with the automatch option e Cell names are case insensitive by default e Top level cells always correspond regardless of names LVS H expands unmatched cells to the next hierarchical correspondence level nearer the top level
179. cking Opens Using RVE Display Net in Layout eese 8 7 Tracking Opens Correct the Problem and Re run LVS usessse 8 8 Tracking Opens Summary osebdsco aoo sh hah M att piss sea iae coa 8 9 Identifying Shorts Using the LVS Report seen 8 10 Tracking Shorts Using RVE 12 sanete ato ovr eie P etets 8 12 Tracking Shorts to the Layout Viewer esses 8 15 Tracking Shorts Display Next Discrepancy sese 8 16 Tracking Shorts Highlight Next Discrepancy in Netlist sssssss 8 17 Tracking Shorts Highlight the Instance esee 8 18 Tracking Shorts W hich Path eia eic iee tt aeri ertt ise dte fea teda ie iet aces 8 19 Tracking Shorts Closer View of the Layout seen 8 20 Tracking Shorts Double Check Layout eeeseeee ene 8 2 Tracking Shorts Correct the Problem and Re Run LVS 8 22 Tracking Shorts Summary 2e EE b ua Dt Rp n Eoo UR HERD rar IU a Reo 8 23 What Happens if there are Both Shorts and Opens seeesssss 8 24 RVE with Both Shorts and Opens sees eene enne 8 25 The Special Case of Power and Ground Shorts and Opens 8 26 What is Special about Power and Ground Nets ssssssssess 8 27 How to Identify Power and Ground Net Problems in the LVS Report 8 28 Resolving Power a
180. cks apply only to interior facing edge pairs interior facing edge pair two layer interior facing edge pair single layer 2 20 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Overlap Checks Overlap Checks Overlap checks are checks between interior facing edge pairs of polygons on two different layers NA INT OXIDE POLY 3 2 21 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 2 19 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Exterior Facing Edge Checks Exterior Facing Edge Checks External RuleChecks apply only to exterior facing edge pairs exterior facing edge pair two layers BH exterior facing edge pairs single layer 2 22 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF External Checks External Checks SS pum EXT OXIDE gt 1 lt 3 EXT OXIDE 3 EXT OXIDE POLY gt 1 lt 2 EXT OXIDE POLY 2 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 2 23 Notes 2 21 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rul
181. completed and the number of discrepancies found 25 Spend a second scrolling through the transcript taking note of the type of information available Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 35 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 26 Make the DRC Summary Report window active by selecting it DRC Summary Report lab drc summary CALIBRE DRC H SUMMARY REPORT Execution Date Time Dalibre Version Rule File Pathname Rule File Title Layout System Layout Path s Layout Primary Cell Current Directory User Name Maximum Results RuleCheck Maximum Result Vertices DRC Results Database Layout Depth Text Depth Summary Report File Geometry Flagging Excluded Cells CheckText Mapping Layers Keep Empty Checks Mon Feb 24 10 04 40 2003 v9 1 9 3 Fri Dec 13 15 05 27 PST 2002 labl rules GDS labi gds labi fuser sallyw calibre using calbr labl sallyw 1000 4096 labi drc results ASCII ALL PRIMARY labi drc summary REPLACE ACUTE NO SKEW NO OFFGRID NO NONSIMPLE POLYGON NO NONSIMPLE PATH NO COMMENT TEXT RULE FILE INFORMATION MEMORY BASED ORIGINAL LAYER STATISTICS LAYER pwell TOTAL Original Geometry Count LAYER contact TOTAL Original Geometry Count 238 1587 LAYER poly TOTAL Original Geometry Count 26 324 LAYER oxide TOTAL Original Geometry Count 70 472 LAYER metall TOTAL Original Geometry Count 119 517 LAYER metal2 Original Geometry Count 189 4
182. d user defined parameter names LAYOUT CASE NO YES SOURCE CASE NO YES e NO default Calibre treats names as case insensitive e YES Calibre treats names as case sensitive Calibre applies case sensitivity when the source or layout netlists are read into the application LAYOUT CASE and SOURCE CASE statements are independent and do not need to be specified together These statements only apply to SPICE netlists 5 17 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Control Case Sensitivity During LVS How to Control Case Sensitivity During LVS Controlled by statement in rules file LVS COMPARE CASE YES NO NAMES TYPES SUBTYPES e YES all comparisons are case sensitive LAYOUT CASE and SOURCE CASE should also be set to YES e NO all comparisons are case insensitive NAMES net instance and port names are case sensitive e TYPES components types are case sensitive e SUBTYPES component subtypes are case sensitive If you are using case sensitivity the Hcell list automatically becomes case sensitive 5 18 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 17 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Identify Unmatched Text Names How to Identify Unmatched Text Names LVS generates a warning if the connectivity
183. d Manuals which will give you all the printed information available on a given topic 1 Make the Calibre Interactive DRC window active again 2 Choose Menu Setup gt Show Tool Tips Make sure the selection box is highlighted This enables Tool Tips When you place the cursor over a button or field that has a Tool Tip available a brief description of the button or the required input displays after about 2 seconds 3 Make the Inputs window active 4 Display the Tool Tip for the Files field What 1s this Tool Tip What interesting thing did you learn about this field from the Tool Tip 5 Try the Tool Tip for the button at the end of the Files field What is the Tool Tip You can leave the Tool Tips on or turn them off for the rest of the labs Now you will learn how to display the Help information in Manual format Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 41 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 1 42 6 Choose Menu Help gt Open Bookcase If this is the first time Acrobat has run on this workstation you will need to accept the license agreement when it appears This launches Adobe Acrobat and automatically loads the Calibre Verification Bookcase Calibre Documentation Calibre Documentation wn E amp a RET User s Manual 4 RET Reference Manual 4 WORKbench User s Manual a Verification a DESIGNrev a RET a MDP F axRc a xCalibrate Release Info Configuring and Licensing Gui
184. d metal2 Click on the red Edit button at the bottom of the text edit window The button will turn green indicating that the rule file may now be edited Edit the antenna rule so that antenna shapes on the poly and metal2 layers will be highlighted in addition to metall shapes Hint refer to the antenna rule example in the lecture notes In the text edit window choose Menu File gt Save to save your changes Choose Menu File gt Close in the text edit window In the Calibre DRC window choose the Load button next to the rule file name field If there are any errors in your modified rule file an error dialog will give you information to help you find the problem If there are problems use the View button to again edit the rule file and correct any errors you find load Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics the rule file after correcting any errors If you still get load errors ask the instructor for help 39 Re run DRC 40 Highlight all ofthe errors What do you see highlighted now Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 27 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics If you modified the antenna rule correctly you should now see this display Congratulations You have made the antenna nets more visible by adding the poly and metal2 shapes to your highlighted display 4 Choose the Eraser icon in the RVE window to clear all highlights 10 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 20
185. d multiple times Numeric variables may be passed as arguments e Specifying only two pairs of non collinear coordinates is interpreted as a rectangle e Boundary crossing same behavior as LAYOUT WINDOW 4 11 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Skip Cells During the DRC Check How to Skip Cells During the DRC Check Calibre normally checks every cell Cells can be skipped via the EXCLUDE CELL statement Allows you to ignore non functional cells for example trademark and copyright information or incomplete cells Add the following to the rules file EXCLUDE CELL cell name e Calibre will not process any objects from any placement of the excluded cell including all hierarchical instances e Cell names can include wildcard characters e Not supported for binary and ASCII input database formats 4 12 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 11 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Limit the Number of Discrepancies in the Report How to Limit the Number of Discrepancies in the Report To control the total number of results generated per RuleCheck add the following to the rules file DRC MAXIMUM RESULTS max ALL e Specifying ALL means that every result error for each RuleChec
186. de a MTflex Guide id 100 i From this document you can find information on all the Calibre applications The top three items in the list are direct links to manuals documenting the Calibre features we will use in this class Just click on the manual s name and the document will open in an Acrobat window The upper three bullets are links to the documentation for this class All the rest of the bullets are for documentation for Calibre products that are outside the scope of this class 7 Open the Verification User s Manual by clicking on it Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 You will notice that down the left side is a Table of Contents like list of all the Chapters in this manual These are called Bookmarks Click on the arrow icon gt just before Chapter 5 DRC Execution This expands the Bookmarks to include lower level topics in Chapter 5 Click on the word Chapter 5 DRC Execution This will jump to the beginning of Chapter 5 This is useful if you have a good idea of exactly what you are looking for but what happens if you have no idea where to start In this case you can start by searching for a word or phrase In the next several steps you will look for information on the DRC results database Click on the Find icon d in the Acrobat toolbar This opens the Find dialog box Enter drc database in the Find What text b
187. ding source device Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 7 73 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 3 32 33 34 35 36 7 74 Device X27 M3 in lab7a i X D Device X27 M3 in layout cell lab7a N b VDD Corresponding Source Device s B X21 Ms Bi Z Experiment highlighting nets and instances from this dialog box When you are finished experimenting with the Device X27 M3 in lab7a dialog box close it This returns you to the Query Layout devices in lab7a Erase all highlights Experiment highlighting from the Query Layout devices in lab7a dialog box Are there any bad devices in the query cell There should not be When you are finished experimenting erase all highlights Notice that you can also select a device by clicking on it in the layout just like you did previously for nets by using the Device by Location command button Experiment selecting devices by using Device by Location Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 When you are finished erase any highlights Close the Query Layout devices in lab7a dialog box Before finishing experimenting with RVE take a look at the query source commands available Choose Query Source Instances This opens the Query Source Instances in lab7a dialog box Notice that the Probe inst in schematic is gr
188. dule 10 Additional Topics 10 Leave the socket as the default number unless the instructor tells you otherwise 11 Check that the cell name is lab10 12 Choose Run to execute the dialog box Both the Calibre Interactive DRC and Choose Runset File windows open 13 Enter lab10_runset txt as the runset file You can use the browser to locate the file name 14 Choose OK to execute the dialog box The Calibre Interactive DRC window opens with the Inputs menu button selected We will now take a closer look at the rule file 15 Click on the Rules menu button This will display the Rules frame in the Calibre Interactive window File lab10a rules should already be specified in the Calibre DRC Rules File field if not use the browser to select the file 16 Choose View Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 21 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics This will open a text window displaying the lab10a rules file DRC Rules File users student using calbr lab10 labi0a rules File Edit Options Windows ff Rule file labl0a_rules for use with Lab 10 of the Using Calibre Training Course ff ANTENNA CHECKS antenna_level2 Ratio of area of poly metall metal2 on same net Gto area of gates formed by poly must be lt 20 net area ratio metall metal2 poly gate gt 20 INCLUDE golden_rules Ed rif 7 BN
189. e Virtual connect is triggered by the rule file VIRTUAL CONNECT COLON and VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME specification statements 6 5 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity What is VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME What is VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Specification statement in the rule file Specifies virtual connections between nets having the specified net names Syntax VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME namel name2 e name name of a net may include wildcard character Virtually connects disjoint nets with the same name Applies only to nets in the top level cell Names are case insensitive by default You may use this statement more than once Names in the list are NOT connected to each other 6 6 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 6 5 Module 6 Connectivity VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Example VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Example You know all the power and ground busses are not connected yet and do not want all the error messages RuleFile VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME VDD VSS VSS VDD No power or ground errors in this run 6 7 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity More VIRTUAL CONNECT NAME Examples More V
190. e Different metal layers become the top layer depending on the process If no process is defined P3 is the default ifdef SP1 LAYER top metal metal6 else ifdef P2 LAYER top_metal metal5 else LAYER top_metal metal4 implies using P3 endif endif 2 10 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes It is not the value of an environment variable that is important it is if the environment variable is set at all Using the above example setting P1 to off or no will not change to process 2 or 3 2 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Rule Efficiency Rule Efficiency Asin programming DRC rules can be written in several ways leading to more or less efficiency Rule efficiency can be achieved through various means Data reduction minimize data fed into a RuleCheck Concurrency Using unique rule features Other techniques conditional execution rule sequencing etc Concurrency example OK Better regular contact contact outside pad regular contact contact outside pad pad contact contact not regular contact pad contact contact not outside pad VL A NN D CN End Different layers used in each rule Same layers used in both rules Rules run sequentially Rules run concurrently 2 11 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation N
191. e instead of to the DRC results database You can verify that the GDSII file was created either by listing the contents of the lab10 directory or by scrolling up in the DRC transcript until you see the message Write to GDS Results Database long_metal2 gds COMPLETED If you don t see evidence of the new GDSII file review your rule file modifications and if necessary ask your instructor for help Let s take a look at your new GDSII plot file In the DESIGNrev window choose Menu File gt Open Layout to load the long metal2 gds file Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics The DESIGNrev window should look similar to below Calibre DESIGNrev E loj xl File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Help A E Z 4 I c od Z All Back fort Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch A bookmarks layouts none best wv ref y poly 9 edge y vrix y text Layers lt lt lt 473 053 435 000 gt Layers 1 1 Show Hide 16 553 20 000 Layout long_metal2 gds Cell lab10 Depth O Grid off Congratulations You now have a file which can be used to easily generate the requested plot 13 Close the rule file if it is still open 14 When you are finished reviewing the plot data close the RVE window but leave the Calibre Interactive DRC and DESIGNrev windows open and proceed to the next exercise Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 33 June 2004
192. e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 13375 y 1400C L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x 5125 Y 51000 L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 xX 13125 y 51000 ESES c ESSI Again there is a fairly large area involved so you will need to do a little detective work Look carefully at the netlists There is a major different between the two netlists see if you can find it How many ports are in each subcircuit a1220 1220 Somewhere in the layout you lost a port There should be the two power ports and three regular ports Useful Information Correct pin layout for 1220 and A1220 4 5 3 4 5 3 S1220 A1220 Additional Useful Information Source NMOS PMOS pin order is D G S B Drains and sources are swappable Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens One more help 1220 NAND Source Schematic Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 55 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens You may want to draw the connections from the A1220 layout netlist below VDD T INi le TN2 L VSS OUT 12 Look at the highlights again A power bus is running over a port d ae JaA MER 27 27 Es 2 24 Where is that port supposed to connect Use the Source netlist to find the answer 8 56 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens A callout of the cell is illustrated below
193. e Calibre DRC Example Load DB into RVE 11 25 iab Information oues desea tanc tumtetetetentene d aaaea etd edid sedis deve 11 26 Lab Command Line Calibre oorr eterno deve o P peo eva 11 27 Exercise 11 1 Command Line DRC Run eese eene 11 28 Exercise 11 2 Command Line LVS RUD uiia eietoectdept ee epoca Oe p teta dier i e ea Le ra 11 32 Exercise 11 3 Command Line to Calibre Interactive sss 11 37 Module 12 Final EX uiiioeetoeseeetoovtt votes dt ved Ven eeu eu sasos oes evi eut en2 sodas caesa soseo qi Due caa LR QUO ES EPA Soi 12 1 Appendix A LVS Report Examples 4 2 7 tasti er2 do ovid aueh eo da ca reo Fea Ha dri Ie eL elo carae dad ded A 1 Reporta eis pete edes e eese E Stem uae esito eG S re dut oo Edu fl scans A 1 xvi Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont RODBOLE 2 satus Mn ANH oae EMI tuia Mani toni eu ed Tomo are ora UE A 5 ISGDOLUS V4 osos o Herd iret ee a a atia Nano utt mE n dU A 16 Appendix B Web Links of Interest eee I o err erano nitet enin I piae PN a ox elvai eive euo n ue B 1 Mentor Graphics Web Sites isse eterne rt vss vsncsedsurcneserdecdessevasesesvadesveswdldestindss B 1 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts sees eseetes ese eed aene eoo a LEE ee Po R eue pa Iu Eee tto on ByR e eoe Ape ARR e DATUR C 1 Transcript of Generating a Basic Hcells List Using the Query Server C 1 Transcript of Interactive
194. e Rules 101 The SVRF Is Rule Order Important 2 8 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Notes 2 6 Rules are order independent Is Rule Order Important Most operations within rules are order independent All of the following statements are equivalent area lt 4 contact contact area 4 area contact 4 lt 4 area contact lt 4 contact area contact 4 area A few operations are order dependent The SVRF Manual will always flag order dependence The following statements are NOT equivalent e contact inside metal e metal inside contact Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What are Conditional Rules What are Conditional Rules Rules are only run if a condition is met Can loosen or tighten specifications For Example How can make different metals the top layer depending on the process Rule execution can be controlled via environment variables Generally don t use conditional rules for the final tape out 2 9 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 7 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF How to use Conditional Rules How to use Conditional Rules Example P1 P2 and P3 are different processes Only one is defined as an environment variable at a tim
195. e button L A 1 58 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction e Unselect everything Type u 19 Changing the Grid a Choose Menu Options gt Grid Settings b Change the grid spacing to 0 001 c Choose Apply d Choose OK 20 Changing the Ruler a Choose Menu Options gt Ruler b Select Manhattan c Select Snap Vertex Edge This will cause the ruler to snap to the edges and make it easier to measure polygons You may want to change it to snap to grids when you are editing polygons to a certain size d Choose Apply e Choose OK 21 Close all Calibre windows so you will be ready for the next lab Do not save any files Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 59 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 1 60 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Explain the SVRF format e Explain basic DRC type rules e Explain basic LVS type rules e Identify the other types of rules and their function e Use golden rule files e Use conditional rules Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 1 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What Does the SVRF Do What Does the SVRF Do Controls the following activities Provides specifications for run data file names etc Defines layers Generates derived layers Defines d
196. e in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv This will open the initial DESIGNrev window Next you will load the GSDII file 4 Choose Menu File gt Open Layout 5 Select file a1220 gds 6 Choose OPEN This loads the layout design you will be using for this lab Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 31 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 7 Load the layer properties Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 8 Select the layer props txt file 9 Choose Open to execute the dialog box This loads the layer properties The DESIGNrev window should look similar to below Calibre DESIGNrev 15 xl File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Help Z4 S amp 4 Ke d ZAI Cuk forth Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch A bookmarks a layouts y none x best vy ref y poly 9 edge y vrix y text Layers lt lt lt 96 031 85 000 gt Layers BH soid Clear Show Hide 54645 65740 db 54 645 65 740 um Layout a1220 gds Cel a1220 Depth O Grid off 10 From DESIGNrev choose Menu Tools gt Calibre Interactive 2 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF This opens the Calibre Interactive Server dialog box Calibre Interactive E Calibre DRC on Cell al ze J Calibre LYS on Cell lal ze J Calibre PEX on Cell lal eeu J Calibre RYE Options
197. e reduced to passthrough nets o Isolated Layout Nets Layout nets which are not connected to any instances or ports 356 455 000 329 000 355 442 000 431 000 354 442 000 305 000 353 442 000 194 000 352 442 000 93 000 351 441 000 5 500 350 435 000 431 000 349 435 000 305 000 348 435 000 194 000 347 435 000 93 000 346 425 000 321 500 345 417 000 349 000 344 409 000 273 000 343 409 000 205 000 342 402 500 150 000 341 402 500 104 000 340 401 000 223 000 339 394 500 111 000 338 393 000 316 000 337 386 500 61 000 336 386 500 0 159 335 385 000 321 500 334 385 000 273 000 333 378 500 447 500 332 378 500 329 000 331 378 500 205 000 330 378 500 104 000 329 370 500 316 000 328 370 500 5 500 327 369 000 329 000 326 362 500 343 500 325 362 500 217 500 324 362 500 11 000 323 354 500 329 000 322 354 500 321 500 321 354 500 273 000 320 354 500 109 500 319 354 500 0 159 318 346 500 442 000 317 346 500 205 000 316 346 500 61 000 315 338 500 387 000 314 338 500 338 000 313 338 500 61 000 312 338 500 11 000 311 330 500 447 500 310 330 500 327 000 309 330 500 273 000 308 330 500 223 000 307 330 375 104 000 o Initial Correspondence Points Ports VDD VSS B 3 A 3 A 2 B 2 A 1 B 1 A 0 B 0 CO C4 S 3 S 2 S 1 S 0 Step Eight Scan the remaining INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section Sometimes useful information such as bad devices shows up here there would have been a warning at the top if so Its also useful to see t
198. eces of poly that need to be fixed We will start with error 3 the poly in the lower left 6 Zoom in to display a close up around this poly You know you need to extend the poly 1 25 beyond the oxide layer You will need something to act as a reference so you will know when you have extended the poly the correct distance You may need to change the Ruler options from Vertex Edge to i Grid Change the options using Menu Options gt Ruler Note 7 Choose Ruler from the Toolbar 8 Click on the bottom edge of the oxide layer 9 Draw a straight line down approximately 1 25 3 64 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Your display should look similar to below Notice that this ruler is 1 258 1 258 10 Select the poly 11 Select the edge that needs stretching a Choose Vertex from the Toolbar b Click in the middle of the lower edge The selected line segment should change to yellow to indicate selection 12 Choose Move from the Toolbar Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 65 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 13 14 15 16 17 3 66 Stretch the segment until it is as long as your ruler indicates Release the mouse button to complete the stretch Type u to unselect everything You should have corrected the first error Now you will correct the second error Display the part of the cell with the other error Use the same methods ruler select ve
199. eck trace these properties Before you start you will need to review the source netlist to find the correct parameters 9 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition The source netlist is re created here for easier discussion sPICE NETLIST HCECECE CEDE NE CET a Se A a A CET E ECETE CEDE ETE ELE a A DT SUBCRE labi trace N 10 EP IP 0 FDGC 7 MO 2 7 V55 VSS n L 1 1e 05 W 1 3e 05 x 27000 Y 142000 Ml VDD 7 2 VOD p L 1 1e 05 W 1 3e 05 x 67000 Y 73000 Re Vss 10 40000 pl x 2150 0 Y 1280 0 R3 V55 4 35 4412 dp x 205000 s 155000 Rd W55 6 13 551 dn x 2 8000 Y 7300 0 C5 9 vss 3 00e 13 nmos xX 137 000 143000 C6 8 vss 1 91e 13 pmos xX 137000 Y 73000 ENDS d E a Tat a et tak Cad Ee ee a Dak ee a ad ee ae Dad Pe ee at CEDERE CEDE r ae TaT What are the three component types in the design What are the component subtypes for the Resistors What are the component subtypes for the Capacitors How many different types of Mosfets are in this subcircuit Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 37 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Are these Mosfet subtypes or types You need to know the difference for the PROPERTY TRACE syntax HINT Mosfets are treated differently syntactically in the SPICE netlist and rule file DEVICE statements What are the component types for the NMOS and PMOS transistors Hint Check the lecture notes Now you are
200. ecognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Identifying Mismatched Instances Identifying Mismatched Instances Could look like any other discrepancy e Incorrect Nets E BE Lvs Results Designs Don t Match e Incorrect Instances L E BI iansa 7 lab5a 6 Discrepancies i Nets i j Clue is in the netlists oiee a Mismatched device instances Discrepancy 43 Incorrect Instances 3 Discrepancies e Source a1230 DEG Fi e Layout a1620 yos eli e Discrepancy 6 Detailed Instance Connections E26 vss VDD 5 3 12 14 a1230 T 56500 229000 0 0 X X23 VSS VDD 54 55 14 a1220 T 40500 17000 0 0 x 3 X29 VSS VDD 15 5 8 9 23 a1240 T 64500 118000 0 0 X27 VSS VDD 11 7 8 a2311 T 48500 355000 0 0 x 442 X30 VSS VDD 10 15 13 a1220 T 88500 17000 1 180 X X32 VSS VDD 7 9 16 18 a1230 T 56500 229000 0 0 X x40 VSS VDD 53 17 54 n T 112500 17000 1 180 x X35 VSS VDD 9 19 12 13 27 a1240 T 64500 118000 0 C AD ST 128500 229000 1 Ld SS VDD 21 57 56 19 17 14 ICV 1 T 88500 17000 x 128500 229000 1 a gt UU 118000 0 0 x 1 e a 500 355000 0 0 VEA vec unn CA 12 0n s100n on RACER 1 7nnhn 1 1AN y y fete 118000 0 0 X 1 9 28 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 9 27 Module 9 Device Recognition Lab Information
201. ed arbitrarily ee hd eee dde dde ede CELL SUMMARY M SSS A ee eS ie EN Row 1 coll i Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 8 25 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 24 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens RVE with Both Shorts and Opens RVE with Both Shorts and Opens Need to work through each discrepancy Calibre LVS RVE svdb lab5a 8 26 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 25 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens The Special Case of Power and Ground Shorts and Opens The Special Case of Power and Ground Shorts and Opens Use slightly different techniques Power and Ground connections help to define devices so many instances may be missing Often many many errors for a single problem 8 27 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens What is Special about Power and Ground Nets What is Special about Power and Ground Nets Usually the largest nets in the design Connect to all levels of the hierarchy Mayintentionally have several names on the same net Can short between cells at different levels in the hierarchy Low
202. el 1 MN x4 level 2 MP x4 level 2 2 a1310 x3 level 1 MN x1 level 2 MP x1 level 2 6 a1620 x3 level 1 MN x3 level 2 MP x3 level 2 6 a1720 x1 level 1 MN x3 level 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts MP x3 level 2 1 a2311 x10 level 1 MN x5 level 2 MP x5 level 2 ICV 1 x6 level 1 a1220 x2 level 2 MN x2 level 3 MP x2 level 3 HHpHhRonpnnmnon OK response file interactive hcells o m netlist report hcells o m response direct o m netlist report hcells a2311 2311 a1220 s1220 The last command in this sequence is not required It is simply a quick check of exactly what was contained in the Hcell list 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 O Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Transcript of Updating an Existing Hcell File Using a New Threshold The example below starts where the previous example left off querying what is in the current Hcell list Therefore launching the Query Server is not required Although loading the rules and setting automatching and placementmatching on is duplicated for completeness You change the threshold to 8 memory savings and create the new Hcell file response direct OK netlist report hcells a2311 s2311 a1220 s1220 netlist automatch on OK netlist placementmatch on OK net
203. ell contains the connectivity error s How many discrepancies What Instance s have the discrepancies Source Layout gt 14 Display the Layout netlist X156 VSS VDD 25 45 a1220 T 320500 17000 0 0 X X160 VSS VDD 16 24 30 12 14 39 ICV 1 T 352500 229C X167 VSS VDD 12 34 48 a2311 T 344500 118000 0 0 x X168 VSS VDD 43 45 42 a2311 T 344500 355000 0 0 X X169 VSS VDD H 61 a1220 T 368500 17000 1 180 X179 VSS VDD 13 47 a1220 T 368500 17000 0 0 X X187 VSS VDD 49 28 48 21 16 49 ICV_1 T 407000 229C X190 VSS VDD 45 47 a1310 T 392500 118000 0 0 x 3 15 Display the Source netlist X160 VSS VDD 25 46 31220 T 320500 17000 0 0 X X164 VSS VDD 39 12 14 s1220 T 352500 229000 1 180 X171 VSS 34 VDD 12 48 s2311 T 344500 118000 0 0 x X172 VSS 46 VDD 43 42 s2311 T 344500 355000 0 0 X X173 VSS VDD 61 s1220 T 368500 17000 1 180 X176 VSS VDD 30 16 24 s1220 T 376500 229000 1 180 X184 VSS VDD 13 47 31220 T 368500 17000 0 0 X v100 wee unn AQ 91 16 e100n m_ANTANN ooannn 1 19N 9 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 16 Highlight the discrepancies in the layout Net 44 Net 45 46 Layout quM Layout X179 X161 Source X184 Layout X169 Source X173 Useful Information Pin layout for S1220 and A1220 4 5 3 4 5 3 S1220 A1220 It looks like the connections to the 4 and 5 pins in x169 are swapped Is it functionally acceptable to swap these pins
204. en rules Sun Feb 16 12 24 37 2003 lvs reportopen txt user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 sallyw v9 1_9 3 Fri Dec 13 15 05 27 PST 2002 OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS GHESERREEREERERSIERERERSERERNSERE INCORRECT HRRHEPRRRHRRR REAR HERE Error Different numbers of nets Error Connectivity errors Warning Ambiguity points were found and resolved arbitrarily LLL NN NO er RD Et ow D OI 8 5 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens How to Identify Opens Using the LVS Report Cont How to Identify Opens Using the LVS Report Cont How do tell if should start looking for a short or an open e Does the Source or Layout have more nets e Check the Initial number of Objects report e source nets lt layout nets therefore most likely an open e Calibre may have matched one source net to two layout nets LVS Report File lvs reportopen txt File Edit Options Windows Instances Total Inst Lj P Luxus MINE So UM UNI Et Row E EE RUD 8 6 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Opens Using RVE Tracking Opens Using RVE Display the discrepancy Calibre LYS RYE svd
205. entor Graphics Corporation Notes Connectivity in derived layers is only passed through the FIRST layer in the derived layer statement For example NGATE POLY AND PAREA connectivity for NGATE only comes from the POLY layer Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 3 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Review of the Device Statement Review of the Device Statement Defines a device template for recognizing instances from a union of geometric shapes Names and classifies a device Specifies device layer pin layers and pin swap groups e Shapes on the device layer seed the recognition process e Devices are recognized if a shape on each pin layer touches overlaps or abuts the shape on the device layer e Pin layer order determines pin name assignment Specifies parameters for device property calculations 9 5 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Example Device Statement Example Device Statement DEVICE MN La POLY NSD NSD PWELL S D 0 9 6 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Device Statement DEVICE MN NGATE POLY NSD NSD PWELL 0 ELEMENT
206. epancies on a cell by cell basis Report summarizes LVS execution time memory allocation and other run statistics LVS generates the report if Calibre executes to completion User specifies report filename from within Calibre Interactive or in a rule file statement 7 24 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What Information is in the LVS Report File What Information is in the LVS Report File LVS report has the following sections see Appendix A Header Overall Comparison Results Incorrect Objects Incorrect Nets Incorrect Instances LVS Parameters Information and Warnings Detailed Instance Connections Unmatched Objects Summary 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 7 25 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 23 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS RVE How to Use Calibre LVS RVE Calibre LVS RYE svdb lab5b Double click 7 26 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Find the Error in the Netlist How to Find the Error in the Netlist VDD 32 24 31230 T 168500 229000 0 0 X83 VSS VDD 58 28 30 s1220 T 1
207. equired information In this lab you will create your own runset and initially enter all the information by hand 9 Choose New Runset in the Choose Runset dialog box This makes the Calibre Interactive DRC dialog box active with the Inputs Menu button active Calibre Interactive DRC Notice that the Layout file name is in red You will need to enter the correct data 10 Select Hierarchical 11 Enter lab3 gds in the Files text box Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 43 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Is is green If it is not green try re entering the GDSII file name using the _ button 12 Unselect Import layout database from layout viewer When you unselect this option you are telling Calibre to use the i file you provided in the Files text box Note When you select this option you are instructing Calibre to create the file in the Files text box from the current layout in the layout viewer If the GSDII file already exists Calibre will ask you to overwrite the existing file 13 Check the name of the Primary cell Is it lab3 If not correct it so lab3 is in the primary cell text box 3 44 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC The dialog box should look similar to below You may have the full path for the GDSII file Calibre Interactive DRC You now have all the required inputs time to load the rule information 14 Choose the Rules Menu Button
208. er Platform Express PX PLDSynthesis PLDSynthesis II Power Analyst Power Analyst Station PowerLogic PowerPCB Power To Create Precision Pre Silicon ProjectX pert ProtoBoard Proto View QDS QNet QualityIBIS QuickCheck QuickFault QuickConnect QuickGrade QuickKHDL QuickHDL Express QuickHDL Pro QuickPart Builder QuickPart Tables QuickParts QuickPath QuickSim QuickStart QuickUse QuickUse Development System QuickVHDL Quiet Quiet Expert RAM Lcompiler RC Delay RC Reduction RapidEx pert REAL Time Solutions Registrar Reliability Advisor Reliability Manager REMEDI Renoir RF Architect RF Gateway RISE ROM Lcompiler RTL X Press Satellite PCB Station Scalable Verification Scaleable Models SCAP Scan Sequential Scepter Scepter DFF Schematic View Compiler SVC Schemgen SDF Software Data Formatter SDL2000 Lcompiler Seamless Seamless ASAP Seamless C Bridge Selective Promotion Sheet Planner Signal Spy Signal Vision SignaMask OPC Signature Synthesis Simulation Manager SimPilot SimView Smartgrid SmartMask SmartParts SmartRouter SmartScri pts Smartshape S NX SneakPath Analyzer Spectra SpeedGate S peedGate DSV SpeedWave SOS Initiative Source Explorer SpiceNet SST Velocity Standard Power Model Format SPMF Structure Recovery Super C Supermax ECAD Super IC Station Supermax ECAD Symbol Genie Symbolscript SymGen SY MED SynthesisWizard System Architect System Design Station
209. er that specifies the number of CPUs to use in the processing If you do not specify a value Calibre DRC H runs on the maximum number of CPUs available 11 14 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 13 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre How to Launch a Calibre LVS Run How to Launch a Calibre LVS Run Flat Calibre LVS run calibre lvs rule file name comparison only run Hierarchical Calibre LVS run calibre lvs hier rule file name comparison only run Calibre LVS extraction only run calibre spice layout spice rule file name extraction only Calibre LVS extraction and comparison run calibre spice layout spice lvs hier auto rule file name extract and compare 11 15 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes The first two examples assume that there already exists an extracted spice netlist for the layout 11 14 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS automatch This switch specifies automatic correspondence by name for cells in hierarchical LVS comparison spice spice file name This switch extracts a hierarchical Spice netlist from the layout system which must be GDS
210. es 3 Change the following Inputs Layout data Layout Files lab8c gds Import layout database from layout viewer Unselected Layout Netlist lab8c layout net 4 Run LVS 5 Using the LVS Summary Report answer the following questions What kind s of error s In what cell s Any differences in the number of Source Layout nets 6 Review the rest of the LVS Summary Report to get an overview of the problems 7 Close the LVS Summary Report Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 59 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 8 In RVE display the Source and Layout netlists 9 Arrange the windows so you can see RVE the two netlists and the layout viewer 10 Highlight the nets involved in the two discrepancies The layout should look similar to below Zoomed in as necessary e Ed AZ The Source netlist X129 vss VDD 29 m 22 31230 T 295000 229000 1 1 X135 VSS VDD 38 25 41 s1220 T 280500 17000 0 0 X X136 VSS 21 VDD 62 42 43 s1620 T 280500 355000 0 C X144 vss VDD i 21 12 16 s1230 T 295000 229000 0 C X145 VSS 41 VDD 16 21 s2311 T 296500 118000 0 0 x X151 VSS VDD 25 13 s1310 T 304500 17000 0 0 x 30C X155 VSS 24 VDD 43 42 s1720 T 312500 355000 0 0 x X160 VSS VDD 44 25 46 s1220 T 320500 17000 0 0 X Xl64 VSS VDD 12 14 31220 T 352500 229000 1 180 1 1 wee 3A mmn 19 AO 40244 m 24A4L nnh 110nnn n n oF 8 60 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts
211. es 101 The SVRF Enclosure and Extension Checks Enclosure and Extension Checks extension edge pairs of poly over oxide enclosure edge pairs of oxide over poly 2 24 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Examples of Enclosure Checks Examples of Enclosure Checks Notice the significance of switching the layer order in the first two examples ZA ANN AU AN AN ANA IW NW ENC OXIDE POLY lt 4 ENC POLY OXIDE lt 4 ENC METAL1 POLY lt 2 2 25 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 2 23 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What are Typical LVS Rules What are Typical LVS Rules Device Statements e device mn ngate ipoly nsd nsd s pwell 0 device r pl rpoly ipoly ipoly 20000 Gate Recognition Statements e LVS GROUND NAME VSS VSSI e LVS POWER NAME VDD VCC e LVS RECOGNIZE GATES ALL 2 26 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Fundamental Ideas of Device Recognition Fundamental Ideas of Device Recognition Device recognition Identifies instances of devices from layout geometry Computes
212. esign RuleChecks Defines devices Defines extracts connectivity Drives Layout vs Schematic comparisons using device recognition Drives Parasitic Extraction not covered in this class Drives OPC ORC not covered in this class 2 4 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Defines layers Allows you to assign a name to a layer number A name makes troubleshooting easier One rule file can drive all Calibre applications thus the addition of PEX and OPC ORC information 2 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What is the Syntax for Rule Statements What is the Syntax for Rule Statements Varies depending on operation e Layer Definition Example LAYER metall 10 LAYER name original layer e Layer Operation DRC Check Example INTERNAL oxide gt 12 14 e Specification Statement Example LVS REPORT name e Connectivity Definition Extraction Example CONNECT layer layer2 2 5 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 3 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What is the Syntax for Rule Statements Cont What is the Syntax for Rule Statements Cont e Design RuleChecks EXAMPLE MY RULECHECK Check for METALI line width lt 5 um INTERNAL metall lt 5 3 e Device Recogniti
213. esults database e If you do not specify this no conflicting connections will be output to a softchk database DRC format Syntax LVS SOFTCHK ower layer report layer ALL e lower layer is a layer through which connectivity is passed e report layer may be one of three keywords UPPER LOWER or CONTACT and specifies on which layer the error gets reported e ALL specifies that all nodes involved in conflicting connections to an error polygon are reported by default the connection chosen by the SCONNECT operation as true is not reported The results database generated is layout primary softchk or Ivs softchk and is stored under the directory specified in your Mask SVDB DIRECTORY statement 6 20 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How to Generate Reports from SCONNECT Data Cont How to Generate Reports from Sconnect Data Cont LVS REPORT OPTION S reports detailed SCONNECT conflicts in the LVS Report File Syntax LVS REPORT OPTION S 6 21 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Locating Soft Connections with the SCONNECT Operator Locating Soft Connections with the SCONNECT Operator Ifthe rule file contains these lines CONNECT METALI WELLTIE BY CONTACT SCONNECT W
214. esults viewer Display the information on the discrepancy in the Discrepancy Viewer in RVE Click on one of the Discrepancies Double click on one of the instance names in the Discrepancy Information window What happens What about the layout viewer As you can see you can cross probe between the netlists discrepancy lists and layout In future labs we will track down and fix LVS errors in this lab we were just exploring the tool and learning about the hierarchy Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 81 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 28 29 30 7 82 Experiment with cross probing as desired Erase all highlights Close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC LVS RVE Netlist windows and Summary Report Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Exercise 7 4 Using the Query Server In the previous exercise you entered a complete Hcell file by hand This is neither desirable or is it easy to maintain for a very large design In this exercise you are going to create Hcell files using the Query Server First you will create the file interactively then you will create a file that automatically meets a given threshold Remember that the Query Server is a command line tool so most of your work in this exercise will be directly from the command line 1 Make sure you are in the lab7 directory 2 Launch the Query server Type
215. eviewing this window First you will notice there are command buttons in three different colors running down the left side of the dialog box These are called Menu buttons Red Menu buttons display windows that do not have complete valid information Green Menu buttons display windows with Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 31 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction complete valid information Black Menu buttons perform an operation or their information is optional Pulldown Menus Calibre Interactive LVS Rules Hierarchical Hat w Calibre CB Inputs Layout vs Netlist Netlist vs Netlist Netlist Extraction Outputs Run Control Transcript Run LYS W Import layout database fi layout viewer Primary Cell Layout Netlist lab1 lay net L Menu Buttons Tabs Pulldown menus are similar to any other application Tabs will vary by window They also use the same color coding as the Menu buttons 1 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 10 11 Select the various Tabs and Menu buttons to review the types of options available You will be told exactly were to look in the future but this is just to familiarize yourself with the basic layout of the tool Close the Calibre Interactive LVS window Menu File gt Exit Choose NO to the Save runset dialog box Return to the layout viewer Next you will open a Calibre In
216. g an Hcells List Using the Query Server 7 38 Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server sse 7 39 Automatically Create Hcell File Meeting a Threshold 7 42 Other Uses Tor the Query Server 66 udsesesestecet venditis aite cos que ades quie etica ded 7 44 Lab Information soon bsc tH o qi op MOMUE CUR AE EEE PSP P REX VE UR aL RUE TES 7 45 babe Basic EV S COnCeptsu iudicii d dae onto totam apte aS os ah s 7 46 Exercise 7212 Basic EVS RU Lu ode tatedodavadtar is Fac e aep Siar A cu eO Rete uus 7 47 Exercise 7 2 Additional LVS RVE Functionality esses 7 61 Exercise 7 3 Hierarchical LVS and Hcells 5 2 2 2 tire decere n bte ni tos aida 7 77 Exercise 7 4 Using the Query Server nt2csscscsvestseehcessunsstseve vere qe eet pd eto epo unie e Mean dux ae OLOR 7 83 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 55 coe piena e Eb Cr NES a PUPPI R eU UHIOS Ease e Ug ve eR Ee ERER e Pre qe iue 8 1 CODIGO VES nose pottea ttatulio ctos teu cou au rooms hs euin tu dnd Mcdever tede 8 1 What are Shorts and Opens uoa ovo dept eet o o e s ecc Gee P e 8 2 What Causes Shorts and Opens etr rt d ER Rr Hexe We seo asad arsi IER 8 3 xii Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont How to Identify Opens Using the LVS Report ssseeeenenenee 8 4 Tracking Opens Usine RVE sares oto ood ete P E AAA a SE D EAR DU port 8 6 Tra
217. g box Enter RESET in the text box Select Exact Select Keep current View for the View Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting 25 Select All Cells as the option 26 Choose Find A very small yellow box appears at the point of the text in the i layout You may need to move the Find Text dialog box so it is not Note obstructing any of the layout Do not close the Find Text dialog box yet 27 Using RVE highlight X17 and net RESET in the source netlist The layout should appear similar to below Expected location for RESET LAYOUT TEXT RESET Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 35 June 2004 Module 5 Texting 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 5 36 Note that the layout net labeled RESET does not connect to layout cell instance X23 It looks like someone placed the layout text RESET object on the wrong net Now we will spend some time examining how the X23 is connected in the layout versus how X17 is connected in the source netlist Click the LMB once over each of the I O pins of X23 in the layout netlist Nets 55 54 and 14 Note than when you select layout net 55 source net 53 highlights Since source net 53 does not connect to source instance X17 this appears to be the problem The layout net 55 should be identified texted as RESET You need to move the layout text to the correct net Make sure Select is selected in the Toolbar Unselect everything except Te
218. give you an idea where a large number of the problems are located 8 Close any RVE and Summary Report windows Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 27 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 9 Re editthe lab4 rules file to comment out the EXCLUDE CELL statement Add to the beginning of the line 10 Save the rule file 11 Load the rule file 4 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 5 Displaying Hierarchical Results in Different Ways In this exercise you will display hierarchical results in two different ways e Displaying errors on the top level of the hierarchy e Displaying errors within the child cell with the error 1 Return to the Calibre Interactive DRC window 2 Choose Menu Setup DRC Options This adds an additional menu button DRC Options to the left side of the window 3 Choose the DRC Options menu button 4 Choose the Output tab 5 Select Output cell errors in cell space option Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 29 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics The Calibre Interactive window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC Hle Transcript Setup Help Rules Output Connect Area DRC Includes Inputs Outputs W Output cell errors in cell space Hierarchical DRC only Run Control Max errors generated per check All 9 Count 1000 DRC Options Transcript Max vertices in output
219. h making area DRC runs until you are comfortable with the process 11 Answer the following questions Can you tell in RVE that you only checked part of the layout Can you tell in the Summary Report that you only checked part of the layout Can you tell in the Transcript that you only checked part of the layout Hint Use Menu Transcript gt Search in Calibre Interactive and look for the phrase LAYOUT WINDOW When would this be a useful tool 12 Close any open RVE and Summary Report windows Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 25 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 13 Unselect Check Area in the Calibre Interactive DRC Inputs window 4 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 4 Run DRC Skipping Cells Often you will want to start running DRC before a design is completely finished To avoid sorting out the errors in incomplete cells it is easier to just skip them In this exercise you will learn how to skip cells 1 Make the Calibre Interactive DRC window active 2 Display the lab4 rules file for edit 3 Find the command syntax you would add to a rule file to exclude a cell Hint Look either in the lecture or in the SVRF Manual What is it What would the command to exclude cell a2311 look like 4 Enter this command to the lab4_rules rule file 5 Save the file 6 Load the rule file 7 Run DRC What kind of results did you get Does this
220. hat the Initial Correspondence Points make sense Another point to note is the plethora of Isolated Layout Nets It is the rare rule write who creates a rule deck that doesn t create many many isolated layout nets Usually this section doesn t have much value Occasionally the user will stumble upon an Isolated Layout Net as being integral to the current LVS problem however it is difficult identify that problem from this report Continue to Step Nine in the INCORRECT OBJECTS section back in the middle of the report A 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SUMMARY kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Total CPU Time 5 2 Total Elapsed Time 10 4111 Report 2 Step One Again notice that there are no compilation or extraction errors HEHEHE HEHE HE PEHE E HERE HE HEHE HEHE HE HE HE HE H RH EH R HB EH BHBHHEHBBHBHBBHE H CALIBRE LVS REPORT HHTHHTHHHTHHHHHHEHHEHHEH HHH HHH BE HHP HHP HHH RHR H REPORT FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs rep LAYOUT NAME LVS ONLINE layout M foo 2 SOURCE NAME LVS ONLINE logic ictraceM default LVS MODE Mask RULE FILE NAME user3 train3 icv lvs online layout master rules CREATION TIME Thu Jul 6 08 24 46 1995 CURRENT DIRECTORY tmp mnt net bentley user3 train3 icv USER NAME train3 Step Two The header indicates the correct pathn
221. hcells inside it were expanded Hierarchical Instance Count 7 Total Instance Contrib 5 x 6 The number of instances this cell contributes to the total hierarchical instance count 8 Total Instance Contrib 7 THIC 100 Column 7 represented as a percentage of total hierarchical instance count 9 Memory Savings Expected memory savings if this cell is used as an hcell 10 Cell Name Cell names designates leaf cells all contents are devices designates current hcells designates cells with the same name in layout and source designates cells that would match via placementmatch lt Flat gt lt With Hcells gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev C 5 June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Instances Devices Total Total Instances Instances Total Total Cell Name of this in this Device Device of this in this Instance Instance Memory leaf cell Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings hcell FDC 1 x 2 3 TFDC HIC 5 x 6 7 THIC same name 4 same placements pins 10 10 100 36 10 10 100 36 29 d a2311 22 4 88 31 22 4 88 31 22 a1220 4 8 32 ii 4 8 32 11 7 1 a1240 5 6 30 11 5 6 30 11 6 8 a1230 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 6 4 3 2 a1620 3 2 6 221 3 2 6 2 1 0 4 a1310 1 280 280 100 0 1 280 280 100 0 0 0 lab7b 1 6 6
222. he DRC Results Database ASCII seen 3 31 How to Use the DRC Results Database RVE eee 3 32 DRC EVESGGUPC AITSUI i reete m atro oo D tfe nv arent 3 33 How to View the Discrepancies by RuleCheck sese 3 34 How to Flag the Status of Discrepancies sess 3 35 How to Use RVE to Locate Discrepancies in the Layout sss 3 36 Displaying the Error in the Layout 64etievateteiithe bt ciieate diete De etat ieds 3 37 Displaying Errors Hierarchically eeesseseeee eene 3 38 Displaying Errors in Context sioe eem eire aa deeft res Eee ero dd 3 39 Kab Informat on sse ea de Dude wane Secs cena ha Diae pe sete did 3 40 Lab Baste DY Clerc meat em iesu tee tarts Mirrors Go Ete Er EE EN E enn ees 3 41 Exercise 3 1 Setup and Run Calibre DRC eee eese e eee eee ttn ttn nant 3 42 Exercise 23 2 C hecketlie Results coirneal pet d 3 51 Exercise 3 3 Correct Errors in the Layout ius pecie ete eid Fa RE a Re aes 3 62 Exercise 3 4 Run Calibre DRC on the New Layout essere 3 69 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics m 4 1 ODJECHVES Tsa arene Runge MMe ert nner Cee Lene eet ania TUN Sram ever craven Me cut 4 What are the Differences between Hierarchical and Flat DRC Runs 4 2 When Should I use Hierarchical Runs essen 4 3 DRC Debugging Techniques sete oett tese n eae tp a eio prete bod eatur dud 4 4 Howto Se ec I
223. his time In the next exercise you will learn how to use DRC to find soft connection problems 8 Close RVE netlist and report windows 6 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Exercise 6 3 Use DRC and STAMP to Find Soft Connection Errors In this exercise you will learn how to use DRC to find the location of a soft connection error 1 Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active 2 Open the rule file 3 Find the bad ntie rule What is the purpose of the bad ntie rule This illustration shows all nties in the layout This layer is the link between VDD and the substrate LLL wc fil L7 Du d D VE f 2 ooo j EE a mm T ili 75s p I i i i pU ees a i i 5 B i Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 29 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Think about this for a minute in this design all good ntie polygons are connected to VDD We need to know about ntie polygons that are not part of VDD these could cause STAMPing violations This is a DRC rule not an LVS type rule 4 Look at the bad ptie rule How does the bad ptie rule work This rule finds pties that are in pwells with soft connections 5 Close the rule file 6 Launch a Calibre Interactive DRC window Leave the Calibre Interactive LVS window open 7 Create a new runset 8 Enter the following Inputs data
224. hort Segment Causing the Short m a mmm repe 8 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Troubleshooting Supply Problems Summary Troubleshooting Supply Problems Summary Start with LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR yes to flag supply problems Run LVS again with LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR no to read LVS report Launch RVE and look for obvious shorts or opens In case of shorts run LVS again and generate the isolate shorts database Use DRC RVE to step through shorted net to find the problem 8 42 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 41 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Find a simple short Find a simple open Isolate problems in a layout with both shorts and opens Find a supply net problem 4 8 43 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 42 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Lab Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens In this lab you will learn how to troubleshoot shorts and opens This will include the simple case of regular nets and the more complex case of supply shorts List of Exercises Exercise 8 1 Trou
225. hould be able to Describe how LVS fits in a verification flow List what input files are required to run an LVS Run a Calibre LVS using the Calibre Interactive Create an Hcell correspondence file Read the various LVS reports Instruct Calibre to ignore specified cells during LVS Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 1 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What is Layout vs Schematic What is Layout vs Schematic Design View Design Architect Composer Layout View e DESIGNrev e Virtuoso StreamView Connectivity Device Schematic HDL Extraction Extraction Compilation Compilation LAYOUT NETLIST SOURCE NETLIST EXTRACTION PHASE 7 4 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What Files Does Calibre Need to Perform LVS What Files Does Calibre Need to Perform LVS CALIBRE 7 5 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 7 3 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive Start by launching DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv Load GDSII design Menu File Open GDS Calibre Interactive Launch Calibre Interactive for LVS Menu Tools gt Ca
226. hp PR testetur alienate 1 13 What are I Os for DRC and LVS sesssseeeeeeer eene 1 14 What are the Various I O Formats eeeeeeeen eene 1 15 Methods for Invoking Calibre Tools essen 1 16 What is Calibre DBSIOINFGVA uote Ne ee ER a dev nucleic 1 17 How to Invoke Calibre DESIGNrev calibredrv ocene 1 18 How dio Ent Help sud e rit duod it odo Streit seite nT 1 19 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev V June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont What is the Command Line Format eeeessssessseeeeeeeeeeeeennnnnes 1 20 Tab HiOEIBAU OTI ic cio latins dettes t testes ach srt edet EDS Ex orent eN eai 1 21 Lab Introduction to Calibre sess eene nennen 1 22 Exercise 1 1 Invoke DESIGNREY 4 2 tetti eed oes eb nda Lian a aad ado bnt ei ata 1 25 Exercise 1 2 Launch Calibre DRC and LVS Interactive sssssssseeeeeeete 1 28 Exercise 1 3 View a Discrepancy with Calibre RVE ccccccccceeseeeeeeceseceeeeeeteeeeeeeaeees 1 38 Exeteise T2 Get Helpi atio issued loas e relata lo aan sdenalssuawinsubalanedantaduterardeetebendaaabeiaddtars 1 41 Exercise 1 5 Experiment with DESIGNTrev cccccsccssccssscessccsscsseccseccesescesecesenessesssacens 1 45 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRE inier reatu eene nonc eatur Pn e cVn pocos aie Du tuae nenus 2 1 Objectives Sage auetugiet eei rete eR OR RED EN eoe fe aor nesters PEE Ee rud bo de 2 1 What Does the SVRF
227. ibre LVS LVS Options Connect LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 18 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Includes How to Use Calibre LVS LVS Options Includes LVS Options Calibre Interactive LVS Supply Report user sallywtraining using calbr v working lab6 lab amp hard rules Gates Shorts ERC Connect Includes 7 19 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 17 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Set Run Control and Run LVS How to Use Calibre LVS Set Run Control and Run LVS Choose Run Control button Calibre Interactive LVS SetRun options as available W Run multi threaded LYS Hierarchical only Use all processors Use processors Choose Run LVS 7 20 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 2 Notes 7 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What are the Possible Outputs from an LVS Run What are the Possible Outputs from an LVS Run C
228. ich cell s have discrepancies Notice that you can get increasing more details as you step through the various output files available 3 Close the DRC Summary Report Window Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 51 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 4 Make the RVE window active Calibre DRC RYE lab3 db n X 3 Errors in 3 of 11 Checks Celllab3 3 Errors 3 52 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 5 Display the full results by clicking on the s until fully expanded Calibre DRC RYE lab3 db o 01 Check min ext oxide poly 1 Error 01 Does the information in this display correspond with the knowledge you already gained from the transcript and the Summary Report Next you will set up the highlight options for displaying the discrepancies in the layout 6 Choose Menu Setup gt Options Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 53 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC This opens the Setup DRC RVE Options dialog box Setup DRC RVE Options 7 Make sure the Highlight tab is displayed 8 Select Zoom cell view to highlight by 9 Enter 0 3 in the text box This zoom works well for the errors in the current layout 10 Make sure the Clear existing highlights option is unselected 11 Choose Apply 12 Choose OK to execute the dialog box Next you will find out a little more information about one of the discrepancies 3 54 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev
229. ighting RVE geometries A single layer is enough for this lab The Calibre Interactive section determines which Calibre interactive tools will be launched In this class we are only covering DRC and LVS The cell names are automatically filled in from the cell selected in DESIGNrev In this case it is the top level cell since you did not select anything The last section covers Calibre RVE For most of this class we will allow RVE to launch automatically after a DRC run so we will not select it at this point Types of RVE options include o specifying the results databases not necessary o 64if you need to run in 64 bit mode Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 29 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction o nowait if you do not want to wait for a license o other licensing options 5 In the dialog box select LVS 6 Check that the cell name is lab1 7 Choose Run to execute the dialog box This launches Calibre LVS m rules 0 o EUN Transcript f Choose Runset File Sa SSS ERR Er I Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Initially Calibre Interactive LVS asks you to choose a runset A runset is a default setting so you can have consistent settings between Calibre runs For this exercise you will not load a runset 8 Choose New Runset in the Choose Runset File dialog box This will make the Calibre Interactive LVS dialog box active We will spend a minute r
230. ilename Writes the results to a file filename rather than to the standard output The Query Server will continue to output to the file until you give it the response direct command 7 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts response direct Outputs the results to the screen STDOUT Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 37 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Automatically Generating an Hcells List Using the Query Server Automatically Generating an Hcell List Using the Query Server 1 Launch the Query Server calibre 2 Automatch Hcells by name netlist 3 Match Hcells by placement query automatch on count netlist placementmatch on 4 Read the rule file netlist read rule file 5 Create Hcell report netlist select hcells 6 Specify Hcell file name response file all hcells 7 Create Hcell file netlist 7 38 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Notes report hcells ee Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation The example above automatically generates an Hcell list by matching the cell names pin counts and number of placements It then limits the Hcell file to the default memory savings threshold 30 This may not give you the best results but it will quickly give you a place to start A complete transcript of the Query Server generating a basic Hcell list is given in Appendix C Query Server Transcripts Transcript of Generating a Basic Hcells L
231. ill also experiment with the Query Server to automatically generate Hcell files List of Exercises Exercise 7 1 Basic LVS Run Exercise 7 2 Additional LVS RVE Functionality Exercise 7 3 Hierarchical LVS and Hcells Exercise 7 4 Using the Query Server 7 46 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Exercise 7 1 Basic LVS Run In this exercise you will manually load all of the information required for a Calibre LVS run You will then run LVS and scan through all the various reports and generated files 1 Change you directory to lab7 cd SHOME using calbr lab7 2 List the files in the directory You should see the seven files e golden rules e lab7 rules e lab7a gds e lab7a source spi e lab7b gds e lab7b source spi e layer props txt e lay net e query rules If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv 4 Open the GDSII file lab7a gds Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 47 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 10 11 12 13 7 48 Load the layer properties file layer_props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab7a Choose New Runset You should now have the Calibre Interactive LVS window open to Inputs with the default information loaded Select Hierarchical Select L
232. imes to produce DRC output on all three interconnect layers remember that only shapes from the first layer are copied to the output Use RVE to highlight antenna rule results in the layout 10 6 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes In the example x y and z are derived layers The last line x or y or z outputs the derived layer Side Note Gate is most likely defined as a derived layer in some other part of the rule file This is not a problem because gate in used within the rule it is only a local variable Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 5 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Additional Antenna Considerations Cont Antenna Rule Example Cont Checktext Rule File Pathname my rule file Ratio of area of po y aora Lanera on san net to area of gates formed by poly must be lt 5 10 7 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Additional Antenna Considerations Additional Antenna Considerations As interconnect layers are added to the chip antenna nets grow and antenna specific gate area changes Add metal1 Add metal2 Add metal3 MET2a MET2a G3 MET1b MET1a G2 G4
233. ing e Text location layer and cell parameters e Text layer assignment rules 5 22 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 21 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Identify Power Ground Texting Problems How to Identify Power Ground Texting Problems Incorrectly named power ground nets may cause one of these results LVS reports Badly formed power ground net name error if the name violates the syntax rules LVS reports Contradictory power ground net name error if the same name is used for both a power and a ground net LVS aborts with the OVERALL COMPARISION RESULTS listed as NOT COMPARED This is overridden by LVS ABORT ON SUPPLY ERROR NO 5 23 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting What is a Port What is a Port Ports of a cell form the external interface of the cell A port can consist of any number of shapes and paths on any number of layers Top level layout ports must be labeled with port text to insure correct generation of the extracted netlist Initial Correspondence Points and Ports e Specify initial correspondence points on ports of the top level cell in the source and layout by adding port text to the input pins e Add port text objects in layout e Use LAYOUT TEXT and PORT LAYER TEXT statements i
234. ing Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens This fix 1s illustrated below Move this via from Extend this metal2 run here to there N A KzzJ LZ DLE LAIVA P LL A EJ Pad ZZ 18 OPTIONAL Fix the layout and run LVS again Make sure to import the changes from the layout 19 When you are ready to go to the next exercise close all Calibre windows except the Calibre Interactive LVS and DESIGNrev windows Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 65 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Exercise 8 4 Troubleshooting a Power to Ground Short Now that you have mastered simple shorts and opens you are ready to tackle the difficult problem of tracking down a Power to Ground short Since Calibre uses the VDD and VSS connects to identify devices the number of discrepancies are often extremely large for just a small layout error l 2 8 66 Open layout lab8d gds in DESIGNrev Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties In Calibre Interactive LVS change the following Inputs Layout data LayoutFiles lab8d gds Import layout database from layout viewer Unselected Layout Netlist lab8d layout net Change the following Rules data Calibre LVS Rules File lab8 supply rules In Calibre Interactive LVS choose Menu Setup gt LVS Options This adds an additional Menu button LVS Options and displays the L
235. ion Error Not Shorts or Opens In this lab you will see what happens when the layers are not properly connected in the rule file 1 Change to the lab6 directory cd SHOME using calbr 1lab6 2 List the files in the directory There should be the following 24 files in the directory golden rules lab6 hard source spi lab6 source spi golden rules hard lab6 name gds lab6 stamp golden rules name lab6 name rules lab6 stamp drc runset golden sconnect lab6 name runset lab6 stamp runset golden stamp lab6 name source spi lab6a gds lab6_hard gds lab6_rules lab6a_runset lab6_hard_rules lab6_sconnect lab6b gds lab6_hard_runset lab6_sconnect_runset layer_props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev 4 Open Layout lab6 hard gds 5 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 6 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab6 7 Load lab6 hard runset as the runset file 6 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 8 Run LVS What happens Read the error message carefully What do you think is the problem Layer psd should be connected to layers metall ipoly and nsd by contact layer 10 Open the rule file 11 Find the CONNECT statements Is psd included in the correct CONNECT statement 12 Make the lab6 hard rules file edita
236. ise 6 5 Connectivity and CONNECT NAME In this exercise you will fix connectivity errors by virtually connecting nets if they have the same name 1 In DESIGNrev open layout lab6_name gds 2 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab5c i The cell name for this exercise is labSc Note 3 Load lab6_name_runset as the runset in Calibre LVS This loads all the data required for your first LVS run on this layout If you closed Calibre LVS and needed to launch it again for this i exercise load the runset again to make sure the correct data is in Note all the fields 4 Run LVS What are your results How many errors do you have These are a lot of errors where would you start The Extraction Report has provided good clues in previous exercises so it is a good starting point for this exercise 5 Open the Extraction Report What does the Extraction Report tell you Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 37 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 10 6 38 Next you will go to the layout and find the text VSS to see why it is broken into four different nets Close the Extraction Report Make the DESIGNrev window active Choose Menu Object gt Find Text This opens the Find Text dialog box Enter VSS in the Text to Find text box Choose Find Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 11 Repeat Find until you know the location of all four nets It appears
237. ist Using the Query Server on page C 1 7 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server 1 Launch the Query calibre query Server 2 Read in netlists specified in rule file netlist read rule file 3 Generate hierarchy report for layout netlist report hierarchy layout 4 Scan the report file Preserving cell a2311 will give RsSssSSSssaS sa Flat gt o A a 2 3 4 q 29 memory savings 9 10 Instances Devices Total X Total Instances Instances ota 7 Tota Cell Name of this in this Device Device of this in this Instance Instance Memory leaf cell Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings hcell FDC 1 xK 2 gt CD TFDC HIC 5 x 6 7 THIC same name m 10 100 22 4 88 4 8 32 5 5 30 3 5 18 3 2 5 1 280 280 1 5 5 140 140 7 39 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Lj LI Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 39 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server Cont Selective Hcell Creation Using the Query Server Cont 5 Add a2311 to Hcelllist netlist hcell a2311 s2311 6 Generate new hierarchy report netlist report hierarchy layout Consider adding a1220 to Hcell list saving 31 lt Cell a2311 is an Hcell and will
238. ith Calibre RVE Exercise 1 4 Get Help Exercise 1 5 Experiment with DESIGNrev 1 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Exercise 1 1 Invoke DESIGNREV In this exercise you will invoke DESIGNrev from the command line load the palette and load a GDSII design 1 From a UNIX shell change your directory to lab1 cd SHOME using calbr labl 2 List the contents of the lab1 directory ls You should see at a minimum the following files e golden rules e labl gds e labl rules e labl runset txt e layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv Do not launch DESIGNrev as a background process Also do not type in the DESIGNrev shell window once the Warning application is invoked until you close it This will open the initial DESIGNrev window Now you will load the GSDII file 4 Choose Menu File gt Open Layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 25 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 5 Select labl gds by double clicking This loads the layout design you will be using for the first parts of this lab Next you load the layer properties file This file gives the various layers names rather than just numbers and gives the layers their expected colors 6 Load the layer properties Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties This opens the Load
239. k gets reported and sent to the DRC Results Database Use this setting for GDS database manipulation e The default is 1000 results per RuleCheck after which a warning is issued and results output is suspended e If the default value is excessive choose a smaller number e Avoid using ALL or numbers greater than 1000 for everyday use the output becomes too great to manage efficiently 4 13 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Create arule group Run DRC checks using only selected rules groups Run DRC checks on specific areas of a layout Run DRC checks skipping cells a A 4 14 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 13 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Lab Advanced DRC Skills In this lab you will experiment with various advanced DRC skills These skills range from observing the value of hierarchical vs flat DRC runs to learning the mechanics of creating and using Rule Groups to applying DRC checking to only certain areas of the cell Since you have made several DRC runs the instructions for this lab assume you know the basics New concepts are completely described but tasks you have done several times before you are
240. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Matched Matched Unmatched Unmatched Component Layout Source Layout Source Type Ports 16 16 0 0 Nets 72 73 0 0 Instances 25 25 0 0 NAND2 7 7 0 0 INV 10 10 0 0 AOI 2 1 5 5 0 0 NAND3 11 UT 0 0 NOR2 4 4 0 0 NAND4 Total Inst 62 62 0 0 Step Six Note that everything has been matched so ICtrace believes it can identify Source Layout correspondences for everything Go back to the INCORRECT OBJECTS list above for Step Seven o Statistics 204 isolated layout nets were deleted 3 passthrough source nets were deleted 2 layout nets were reduced to passthrough nets 2 source nets were reduced to passthrough nets o Isolated Layout Nets Layout nets which are not connected to any instances or ports 354 455 000 329 000 353 442 000 431 000 352 442 000 305 000 351 442 000 194 000 350 442 000 93 000 349 441 000 5 500 348 435 000 431 000 347 435 000 305 000 346 435 000 194 000 345 435 000 93 000 344 425 000 321 500 343 417 000 349 000 342 409 000 273 000 341 409 000 205 000 340 402 500 150 000 339 402 500 104 000 338 401 000 223 000 337 394 500 111 000 336 393 000 316 000 335 386 500 61 000 334 386 500 0 159 333 385 000 321 500 332 385 000 273 000 331 378 500 447 500 330 378 500 329 000 329 378 500 205 000 328 378 500 104 000 327 370 500 316 000 326 370 500 5 500 325 369 000 329 000 324 362 500 343 500 323 362 500 217 500 322 362 500 11 000 321 354 500 329 000 320 354 500 321 500 319
241. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk xINCORRECT INSTANCES DISCH LAYOUT NAME kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 51 154 69 625 169 0 ne SOURCE NAME 00 missing instance Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples missing 54 164 93 625 169 000 55 143 33 625 169 000 56 146 41 625 169 000 57 148 49 625 169 000 58 151 57 625 169 000 59 130 373 875 132 000 60 133 381 875 132 000 61 126 365 875 132 000 62 112 325 875 132 000 63 115 333 875 132 000 64 109 317 875 132 000 65 94 277 875 132 000 66 97 285 875 132 000 67 90 269 875 132 000 68 76 229 875 132 000 69 78 237 875 132 000 70 72 221 875 132 000 71 58 181 875 132 000 72 61 189 875 132 000 73 55 173 875 132 000 74 39 133 875 132 000 75 42 141 875 132 000 76 37 125 875 132 000 77 136 397 875 132 000 78 276 397 625 169 000 79 SPUP 2 1 Transistors 177 125 625 169 000 170 109 625 169 000 173 117 625 169 000 missing 80 SUP2 Transistors 179 133 625 169 000 182 141 625 169 000 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance instance gate gate Appendix A LVS Report Ex
242. l2 and metal3 min 4 7 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 4 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From Calibre Interactive How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From Calibre Interactive Select Check Area option Choose button to enter the area using the layout editor Select area in the layout by creating a rectangle using the LMB Calibre Interactive DRC Hle Transcript Setup 4 Hierarchical Layout Outputs Run Control Files iabab gas e Transcript W Import layout database from layout viewer RunDRC primary cen fiab b Start RYE W Check area 25 5 269 303 6 405 3 aon 4 8 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation LI Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From the Rule File How to Check Just a Selected Area of the Layout From the Rule File LAYOUT WINDOW x1 yl x2 y2 nx ny x1 y1 x2 y2 are the opposite coordinates of a rectangle minimum requirements May define a shape other then a rectangle by using more coordinates May have multiple LAYOUT WINDOW commands in the rule file 4 9 Using Calibre Advanced DRC Topics Copyright 2
243. lden rule file which contains the DRC rules specific to the processing technology that will be used to fabricate the design In the first exercise you will invoke Calibre DRC from within the layout editor after loading the nand cell layout At the completion of the DRC run you will invoke RVE to cross probe the DRC results into the layout In the second exercise you will change the failure criteria for one of the rules by setting an environment variable and then re run the DRC check to see the impact of the change In the third exercise you will write two DRC rules related to minimum transistor size and then run Calibre DRC one more time noting the results and cross probing them into the layout List of Exercises Exercise 2 1 Load a Design amp Prepare for DRC Exercise 2 2 Run DRC Exercise 2 3 Write Transistor Checks 2 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Exercise 2 1 Load a Design amp Prepare for DRC In this exercise you will invoke DESIGNrev from the command line load the palette load a GDSII design and review the rule file which will be used for the DRC run 1 From a UNIX shell change your directory to lab2 cd SHOME using calbr lab2 2 List the contents of the lab2 directory ls You should see at a minimum the following files e a1220 gds e ab2 rules e lab2 runset txt e layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you ar
244. le arret rena nort eui nro tc aere diet 9 19 How to Handle Unused Devices teer rerit a eet 9 20 Pin Swapping cens caf ee opere erre ote eed eE EE pe uide Nard dre elt idet aide 9 2 Avoiding False Pin Swap Discrepancies in LVS 9 22 Identifying a Pin Swap Discrepancy with LVS RVE eene 9 23 Resolving a Pin Swap Discrepancy eo en aed causes te ER tascesedvcssaees 9 25 What Types of Errors Occur if a Contact is Misplaced sssuss 9 26 Identifying Mismatched Instances cuts ido eid o te dn dida eben t 9 27 xiv Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont Lab Iiformatioro 5i E pct etit Et ER ERE eile envied poteet bd RE BA 9 28 Kab Device Recognition aiat Drain Praed E Don MPa e FORD RED ra rt 9 29 Exercise 9 1 Find a Pin Swap Discrepancy eese secrete ettari iota tate e eet n egre edo 9 30 Exercise 0 2 Property Tracing doo p de Pret da ced cod V adde esos i 9 35 Module 10 Additional TOPICS PIT ct 10 1 ODI Cet CS oeste Des itat tubo tob a a des bL Ato oeuf tte Amb 10 1 What 158p Antenna cece walt ed iet Lon Lovato adeo its 10 2 Antenna R le Basies uu aco neos e Hr ERO Hd RE ER RES Co dere a ord 10 3 How to Find Net Area Ratio oi adoret ot tod eus utin ides Mec 10 4 Antenna Rule Example siriar inii tea oa oit irapa tended di deis bus 10 5 Additional Antenna Considerations ccccccccccccccesccceesseceecesseeceseseeeeessseece
245. le file You will want to launch Calibre RVE after you do as much analysis as you can from the command line To do this you need to create the SVDB Mask data Look in the SVRF Manual to find the command for creating directory svdb with the query option Write the answer below 7 Add this line to the rule file 8 Save the file 9 Close the file You will want to run this in hierarchical mode and have Calibre automatically match any cell names to aid in hierarchical comparisons You will also want to create a netlist of the layout and place it in file lablla layout spi Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 33 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What are the option switches you will need for command line Calibre What will your command line for this run look like 10 Run LVS using your command If it does not work go back to the lecture or documentation to find out what is missing 11 Look at the transcript Is the LVS comparison correct 12 Open the lvs report lablla file using any text editor viewer What are the error s What cell has the problem 11 34 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Is the problem obvious from the report What are the net names Layout Net Source Net 13 Close the LVS report 14 Open the source lablla source spi and layout lablla layout spi netlists in text editors viewers 15 Find these nets in both netlists Not
246. le load 11 7 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Example Rule File for DRC Example Rule File for DRC Use this Rule File for running DRC checks on the 4 bit adder design LAYOUT SYSTEM gdsii LAYOUT PATH SHOME layout files 4 bit adder gds LAYOUT PRIMARY 4 bit adder DRC RESULTS DATABASE 4 bit adder drc results DRC SUMMARY REPORT 4 bit drc summary report Include the factory golden rules INCLUDE SHOME master rules factory golden rules 11 8 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre LVS What Specifications are Required in the Rule File Calibre LVS SOURCE SYSTEM Specifies the source data format SOURCE PATH Specifies the source data path filename SOURCE PRIMARY Specifies the top level cell within the source data LVS REPORT Specifies where to save the LVS Report 11 9 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Specifications are Optional in the Rule File LVS Calibre What Specifications are Optional in the Rule File
247. libre Interactive Select Calibre LVS bre PEX on ell abaa i Calibre RYE Options J j _ Multi layer Highlights Alternate view cell poA NND f 7 6 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive How to Use Calibre LVS Invoking Calibre Interactive Start by launching Virtuoso on the design Launch Calibre Interactive for LVS Menu Calibre Run LVS Run DRC 7 7 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Load Runset and Rules How to Use Calibre LVS Load Runset and Rules Load the Runset or create a new one Choose Runset File Runset File Path e OK New Runset Load the rules Set run directory Calibre Interactive LVS Inputs Outputs Run Control Calibre LVS Run Directory Transcript Jr 7 8 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Layout How to Use Calibre LVS Load the Layout Choose the Input
248. libre Interactive DRC window open with the default data loaded Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 15 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 8 Enter the following Inputs data Hierarchical Flat or Calibre CB Flat Layout Files lab4 gds Import layout database from layout viewer unselected Primary Cell lab4 Check Area unselected 9 Enter the following Rules data Calibre DRC Rules File lab4 rules Calibre DRC Run Directory 10 Enter the following Outputs data DRC Results Database File lab4 flat db Format ASCII Start RVE after DRC finishes selected Write DRC Summary Report selected File lab4_flat_report Replace File selected View summary report after DRC finishes selected 11 View the Transcript 12 Choose Run DRC How many discrepancies did you have This layout has quite a few errors 4 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 13 14 15 16 17 18 Do you think running in Hierarchal mode would help Is this the type of design where you could gain benefits from hierarchy Close the RVE and Summary Report windows Change the following DRC parameters Inputs Hierarchical Flat or Calibre CB Hierarchical Outputs DRC Results Database File lab4 hier db Outputs DRC Summary Report File lab4 hier report View the Transcript Run DRC again How many errors do you have this time What happened to the rest of the errors This seems like a much
249. libre LVS Set Run Control and Run LVS 7 18 What are the Possible Outputs from an LVS Run seeeeeeee 7 19 How to Read the LVS Transcript etti eerie ex it eren eee FEES e Deve v edo 7 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev xi June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont Transcript in the Calibre Interactive Window sene 7 21 How to Read the LVS Report File erret rre reto reas 7 22 What Information is in the LVS Report File ssssesseeeneeere 7 23 How to Use Calibre LVS RVE cites cese esee pU RR Ea rettet keit ete oit eeu 7 24 How to Find the Error in the INGITISE s n retos ree ream qud egt qd v etve rte ch dvois 7 25 How to Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer sese 7 26 How to Cross Probe RVE to Layout Viewer eese 7 27 Whati EVS BOX mcr cH POCO 7 28 How to us E VS OX iei isnt be ber aed to deben Detur ar e dees eeeuns 7 29 What is Automatic Cell Correspondence sssssssssseeeeee 7 30 How does Hcell File Specify Cell Correspondence ssessssss 7 31 Creating the Hcell Correspondence File ccccecccecesseeseeeeeeneceneeeceseeeeseeeeeas 7 33 Example Hcell Correspondence File esee 7 34 How to Select Cell Correspondence i ter tenerte cttm ae erras tenete 7 35 Aid for Hcell File Creation Query Server eese tienen 7 36 Automatically Generatin
250. libre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Double Check Layout Tracking Shorts Double Check Layout Display the lower context Does your suspected polygon still look like the problem BNBNENA ANE SN NSN HL eocbi i 1 e ze SESS CNW NS MESSIS 8 22 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 21 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Correct the Problem and Re Run LVS Tracking Shorts Correct the Problem and Re Run LVS Correct the problem Save the GDSII File Viewer user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 lvs report Re run LVS EE abe LVS REPORT Li Li GEIEERSERSERNIEREEESERERNEREIERERISIERERERESIERIRESERISIERSE RISE BAHAR RH BH REPORT FILE NAME lvs report LAYOUT NAME lay net lab5a SOURCE NAME fuser sallyw calibre using calbr lab5 lab5a src spi RULE FILE lab5 rules CREATION TIME Fri Feb 7 09 16 33 2003 CURRENT DIRECTORY fuser sallyw calibre using calbr lab5 USER NAME sallyw CALIBRE VERSION v9 1 9 4 Thu Dec 19 14 04 47 PST 2002 OVERALL COMPARISON RESULTS PREPARA PERE RE RRR CORRECT GREEN aS E E E ous DER EE Row ou 8 23 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 22 Using C
251. libre with DESIGNrev 11 1 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre How to Launch Calibre Interactive from the Command Line How to Launch Calibre Interactive from the Command Line Launch Calibre Interactive using the following MGC HOME bin calibre gui Displays the following Calibre Interactive DRC LVS PEX RVE Choose a button to launch the desired Calibre Interactive Calibre Interactive DRC ERE Transcript Calibre DRC Run Directory m 11 3 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre How to Run Calibre Exclusively from the Command Line How to Run Calibre Exclusively from the Command Line Edit the rule file Invoke Calibre using the various option switches View the reports using a text editor or view results using RVE 11 4 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 3 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Why do I Need to Edit the Rule File Why do Need to Edit the Rule File Never want to edit the golden rule file Define all the information that Calibre Interactive would normally supply e Input and output file names e Layout file format e Name of the top level cell e Summary report
252. list read query rules Initializing LVS READING layout Layout READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 1 MALLOC 1 1 1 READING source Source READ CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 LVHEAP 0 0 1 MALLOC 1 1 1 Identifying CORRESPONDING cells CORRESPONDING Cells Identified CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Adding GLOBAL elements Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts GLOBAL elements added CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Resolving DEEP SHORTS DEEP SHORTS resolved CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Resolving HIGH SHORTS HIGH SHORTS resolved CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 Deleting TRIVIAL PINS TRIVIAL PINS deleted CPU TIME OK netlist evaluation threshold 8 OK netlist evaluation current hcells no 0 REAL TIME 0 CALIBRE LVS Total Hier Saved Total Potential Layout Source Instance Count By This Savings Remaining Cell Cell Layout Source Cell So Far Savings Name Name 138 138 51 51 35 118 118 14 58 24 a1240 s1240 99 99 16 9 1 a1230 s1230 90 90 9 1 68 0 0 al620 s1620 OK response file interactive_hcells OK netlist report hcells OK C 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts OK netlist report hcells a2311 s2311 a1220 s1220 a1240 s1240 a1230 s1230 al620 s1620 OK Again the last line is not required It just shows you that the new Hcells were indeed added to the Hcell list
253. log 11 19 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre How to View the Results How to View the Results Useany text editor to view the reports Use RVE to cross probe results e Use the results database files e Invoke RVE from command line calibre rve results database file e Invoke RVE from Calibre Interactive 11 20 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 19 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Edit the Rule File Command Line Calibre DRC Example Edit the Rule File Text Editor V3 6 1 build_21 sundown lab4_rules T ESE ESS i 1 4 Rule file for use with Lab 4 of the Using Calibre Training Course LAYOUT SYSTEM GDS LAYOUT PATH MGC wD lab4 lab4 gds LAYOUT PRIMARY lab4 DRC RESULTS DATABASE lab4 hier db DRC SUMMARY REPORT lab4 hier report INCLUDE agolden rul es 11 21 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Launch Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Launch Calibre 11 22 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Notes Terminal sund
254. lose the rule file text window 2 36 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Exercise 2 2 Run DRC We will now run the DRC check and cross probe the results into the layout viewer DESIGNrev 1 In the Calibre Interactive DRC window choose the Run DRC menu button When the run completes the Transcript window will look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC users student using calbr lab2 lab2 runset Ext Hle Transcript Setup Help Rules CALIBRE DRC F EXECUTIVE MODULE COMPLETED CPU TIME 0 REAL TOTAL RULECHECKS EXECUTED 10 Inputs TOTAL RESULTS GENERATED 3 DRC RESULTS DATABASE FILE a1220 drc results ASCII Outputs CALIBRE DRC F COMPLETED Tue Mar 4 09 59 20 2003 Run Control TOTAL CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 SUMMARY REPORT FILE a1220 dre summary Transcript Calibre v9 1 8 2 Fri Nov 1 12 37 22 PST 2002 Litho Libraries v9 1 8 2 Thu Oct 31 12 32 31 PST 2002 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2002 All Rights Reserved THIS WORK CONTAINS TRADE SECRET AND PROPRIETARY INFORMA WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION OR ITS LICENSORS AND IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE TERMS Mentor Graphics software executing under Sun SPARC Solaris Running on SunOS chicago 5 8 Generic_108528 11 sundu Starting time Tue Mar 4 09 59 20 2003 Graphical User Interface startup Complete The top several lines indicate successful DRC completion
255. lowXpert FORMA FormalPro FPGA Advantage FPG Advisor FPGA BoardLink FPGA Builder FPGASim FPGA Station FPGA Xchange FrameConnect Fusion Galileo Gate Station GateGraph GatePlace GateRoute Gemini GDT GDT Core GDT Designer GDT Developer GENIE GenWare Geom Genie HDL2Graphics HDL Architect HDL Architect Station HDL Assistant HDL Author HDL Designer HDL Designer Series HDL Detective HDL Inventor HDL Link HDL Pilot HDL Processor HDLSim HDLWrite Hierarchial Injection Hierarchy Injection HIC rules Hardware Modeling Library HotPlot Hybrid Designer Hybrid Station HyperLynx HyperSuite IC Design Station IC Designer IC Layout Station Library Manager IC Station Streamview ICbasic ICblocks ICcheck ICcompact ICdevice ICextract ICGen ICgraph ICLink IClister ICplan ICRT Controller Lcompiler ICrules IC Studio ICtrace ICverify ICview ICX ICX Active ICX Plan ICX Pro ICX Sentry ICX Tau ICX Verify ICX Vision ICX Custom Model ICX Custom Modeling ICX Project Modeling ICX Standard Library IDEA Series Idea Station IKOSG In All The Right Places INFORM IFX Inexia Innovate PCB Innoveda Integrated Product Development Integra Station Integration Tool Kit IT INTELLITEST Interactive LAYOUT Interconnect Table Interface Based Design IB Inventra Inventra IPX Inventra Soft Cores IP Engine IP Evaluation Kit IP Factory IP PCB IP QuickUse IPSim IS Analyzer IS Floorpla
256. ls Transcript Hierarchical Options Run LVS W Match cells by name automatch _j Use H Cells list from file MEME What is automatching Think Hierarchy 22 Choose the Rules Menu button 23 Enter lab7 rules as the Calibre LVS Rules File 24 Choose Load to load the rule file 25 View the rule file 7 52 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What does this rule file do 26 Close the rule file 27 Enter no quote marks as the Calibre LVS Run Directory The Calibre Interactive LVS window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive LVS In Hle Transcript Setup Help Inputs Outputs Run Control Transcript Run LVS Start RVE Calibre L VS Rules File 8 vw tma Calibre LVS Run Directory 28 Choose the Outputs Menu button 29 Enter lab7a lvs report as the LVS Report File 30 Select View Report after LVS finishes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 53 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 31 Select Create SVDB Database 32 Select Start RVE after LVS finishes 33 Unselect Generate data for Calibre xRC 34 Unselect Generate Calibre Connectivity Interface data 35 Enter svdb as the SVDB Directory The Calibre Interactive LVS window should look similar to below
257. lt Result Result Result Result Result Note that rules min metall width min spacing metall and min ext oxide poly all had one violation each Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 4 When you are finished viewing the report close the report window 5 6 Choose Menu File gt Close We will now open Calibre RVE to cross probe these results into the layout Make the RVE window active Choose Menu View gt By Check The RVE window will look similar to below Calibre DRC RVE a1220 drc results gt Go Ho 2 X E amp 3 Errors in 3 of 10 Checks X Check min metall width 1 Error ll Check min metal2 width E Check min contact width I Check min oxide spacing E Check min pwell spacing X Check min spacing metall 1 Error E Check min spacing metal2 E Check metall enclose cont X Check min ext oxide poly 1 Error A Pf f Checktext Rule File Pathname _lab2_rules_ Minimum poly width 1 25 Check min poly width 0 Errors Note that all rules are listed and the ones involved in violations are preceded by a red X Since the cell layout fits completely within the DESIGNrev edit window we are going to instruct RVE to maintain our DESIGNrev window size as we display each of the violations In larger Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 2 39
258. ly Creating Hcell File essesssssssss C 4 Transcript of Updating an Existing Hcell File Using a New Threshold C 11 Appendix D Schematics Tor Lab CIE QUIE ia eec os reo ae ense taa ED IH Av REI PEE kIP pH vx CURA D 1 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev xvii June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont xviii Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 About This Training Workbook About This Training Workbook This document is the Using Calibre training workbook which instructs in the concepts necessary for efficient use of the Mentor Graphics Calibre layout verification tool set when verifying an IC design Audience The information in this course is intended for IC Layout Engineers Specialists who will use the Calibre tools to check the design of Very Large Scale Integration VLSI layout and who have the prerequisite knowledge specified below What this course is not e xCalibre or xRC the Mentor Graphics parasitic analysis tools is not taught in this course e Creation of the rule file a control file that directs the Calibre verification tool is not taught in this course However because persons who write rule files should also know the user aspects of Calibre they too might wish to participate in this course Prerequisite Knowledge e Students should have knowledge of IC layout techniques and procedures e The user should have pre existing knowledge of an IC layout tool
259. match the adjacent pieces of poly You will fix this error in the next exercise Next you will look at another error 21 Return to the Calibre RVE window 22 Choose the k button Highlight Next Error from the Toolbar 3 58 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC This displays the n he layou What is the problem with this part of the layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 59 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC 23 Display the last discrepancy using RVE VP TLS TE TLL TL LEER TLL LT LOC PRE LATE PLL LE This time you are a little too zoomed in to really see the problem 3 60 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC View gt Zoom Out at least twice to display another poly 24 Choose Menu Vie UE What appears to be the problem Exactly where and what cell i um inp om You may need to ti e the view so you only looking at the polygon zu ern and chang archy to find the answer In the next exercise you will correct this error Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 20 Module 3 Basic DRC Exercise 3 3 Correct Errors in the Layout In this exercise you will be given step by step instructions to correct the problems in al720 You know there are two problems The first is a narrow poly in the upper right of the cell and the second is an overlap that is too small in the lower left of the cell First we need to establi
260. mponents Cont ELEMENT MN I i NET Y Bulk NET 3 Layout Netlist MO 42 1 23 n L 1 25e 6 W 1 5e 5 NOTE Nets 1 2 42 and 3 are arbitrary numbers Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 9 10 Using Calibre Device Recognition Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 9 9 Module 9 Device Recognition Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont Associating Layout Devices to Source Components Cont ELEMENT MN i NET Y Bulk NET 3 Bulk NET 7 Layout Netlist MO 42 1 2 3 n L 1 25e 6 W 1 5e 5 Source Netlist M2 Y 554 7 n L 1 25e 6 W 1 5e 5 Device matches at this point additional connectivity information is required for complete match what other devices instances share these nets 9 11 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition How Calibre Recognizes Logic Gates in the Layout How Calibre Recognizes Logic Gates in the Layout LVS RECOGNIZE GATES ALL SIMPLE NONE e ALL default allows complex gate recognition AOI OAI high level series parallel structures e SIMPLE all recognition of N AND N OR INVERTER gates NONE prevents recognition Gate recognition allows swapping of equivalent pins Restrictions e Power and ground nets must be named in the layout e Transistors must have at least three pins with pin names
261. n TEXT DEPTH ALL PRIMARY number e ALL uses text from all levels of the hierarchy default e PRIMARY only uses text from the top level cell e number specifies recognition of all text from top level through level number where 0 equals the top level e This does not apply to text placed with the TEXT statement which is read only from the top level cell Example TEXT DEPTH PRIMARY ignore superfluous text in the low level cells 5 11 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Attach Text Labels to Target Objects How to Attach Text Labels to Target Objects Choose one of the following methodologies e Explicit Attachment highest priority requires an ATTACH statement e Implicit Attachment lower priority requires text layer and target layer to be the same e Free Attachment lowest priority requires a LABEL ORDER statement Target object layers must appear directly in or be derived with net preserving operations from one of these e CONNECT e SCONNECT e STAMP e POLYNET 5 12 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 5 11 Module 5 Texting Example of Explicitly Attached Text Example of Explicitly Attached Text CONNECT metall metaD BY via ESTABLISH CONNECTIVITY TEXT LAYER 50 SPE
262. n ext oxide poly 13 Close the DRC Results Database If you did not have RVE and DESIGNrev available you would be able to find the problem by finding these coordinates in the layout Not as easy but doable Now you are ready to try an LVS run Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 31 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Exercise 11 2 Command Line LVS Run In this exercise you will perform an LVS run and see if you can track down the problem You will then launch RVE from the command line to assist in verifying your solution 1 Answer the following questions What are the four additional specification statements that need to be added to the rule file for an LVS run 2 Using any text editor open the lab11 rules file Do you need to remove any of the specification statements you added for the DRC run Write a specification statement specifying the source system to be spice 3 Add this statement to the rule file Write a specification statement specifying the source file as lab1 1a_source spi 4 Add this statement to the rule file 11 32 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Write a specification statement specifying the source s top cell as lab1 la 5 Add this statement to the rule file Write a specification statement creating the LVS Report Ivs_report_lab1 la 6 Add this statement to the rule file You will want to enter one more specification line to the ru
263. n indicating that you may now edit the file Find the three layer derivation statements in the rule file lines 27 29 Each derived layer will consist of a collection of shapes copied from the input layers based on the derivation rule For example m1 cont metall AND contact would create a derived layer of shapes that were copies of all areas overlapped by both a contact shape and a metall shape Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 47 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Briefly describe the contents of each derived layer in the rule filer 7 Scroll to the bottom of the rule file and delete the two lines that read REMOVE THIS LINE TO ACTIVATE TRANSISTOR RULES These two lines were originally placed in the rule file to comment out the incomplete transistor rules 8 Insert an appropriate internal spacing statement into the two transistor RuleChecks to verify minimum transistor lengths HINT Refer to the minimum poly width rule in line 38 for the internal statement format use the appropriate derived gate layer in each of your statements 9 Choose Menu File Save 10 In the Calibre Interactive DRC window choose the Load button next to the rule file name to load the updated rule file 11 Choose Menu File gt Close to close the rule file text edit window 12 Choose the Run DRC menu button If you wrote the transistor length rules correctly and you did not fix any of the errors in the previous exe
264. n Rule file as appropriate 5 24 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 23 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Use Port Texting How to Use Port Texting Defining Ports e Ports are specified for the top level cell using PORT LAYER TEXT and PORT LAYER POLYGON specification statements in the rule file Port Text and Polygon Objects e Text and polygons on port layers are read and treated as ports e Port Layer Text supports text objects where the port s layer location and name are the same as the layer location and value of the text object e Text and geometries defined in the rule file with the TEXT and POLYGON statements cannot become ports Whatif Port Texting is incorrect e Shorts e Opens e Wrong connections 5 25 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Find mismatched text names Find badly placed text Find non functional text labels Review the Initial Correspondence report 9 9 5 26 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 25 June 2004 Module 5 Texting Lab Texting In this lab you will explore three different types of texting problems using Calibre LVS Since you have no
265. n the derived edge layer generated in the LENGTH statement 4 Close the text edit window when you are finished studying the rule file 10 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics 5 Choose Load to load the rule file You must load the rule file to guarantee Calibre uses the correct rule file Note 6 In the Calibre Interactive DRC window choose the Run DRC Menu button 7 When the DRC run completes and the RVE window opens use RVE to highlight all of the long metal2 nets Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 31 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics 10 11 12 10 32 Having seen the highlighted long metal2 nets the designer now asks you to produce a plot showing just those nets How will you do this One approach is to create a new GDS file that contains only the long metal2 shapes This file can then be loaded into the layout viewer for plotting It looks like we ll need to modify the rule file to generate the GDSII plot file Edit the rule file by adding a statement which will o write all results from the long metal2 rule to a GDSII file named long metal2 gds o place the shapes on GDS layer 1 o datatype 0 Hint Refer to the lecture slide examples Erase all current highlights Close RVE Re run DRC If you correctly modified the rule file the RVE window should now show no errors because the long metal2 results were written to the GDSII plot fil
266. n the other direction see the LVS REDUCE statement in the SVRF Manual Restrictions Transistor component type subtype pin number and pin names must be consistent throughout the group 9 18 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 17 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Reducing Series MOS Transistors Reducing Series MOS Transistors A A AAO m A To specify whether to perform device reduction LVS REDUCE SERIES MOS NO YES Restrictions e Transistors must be of same device type have same number of pins and matching pin names 9 19 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition What Other Devices are Reducible What Other Devices are Reducible Split gate series parallel MOS transistors Parallel bipolar transistors Parallel capacitors Series capacitors Parallel resistors Series resistors Parallel diodes 9 20 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 9 19 Module 9 Device Recognition How to Handle Unused Devices How to Handle Unused Devices Filtering In the rule file LVS FILTER UNUSED MOS BIPOLAR What configurations are filtered out e Floating source or drain e Shorted
267. name lab4 rules Dou enclosure of poly by oxide 1 25 rol625 426000 109975 426000 625 426500 103375 426500 11 25 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Load DB into RVE Command Line Calibre DRC Example Load DB into RVE Terminal undown calibre rve lab4_hier db Calibre v9 1 9 4 Thu te 19 14 04 47 PST 2002 Litho Libraries v9 1_9 2 Fri Dec 6 12 47 01 PST 2002 Copyright Menta Mentor Graphics software d Running on SunOS sundown L Starting time Tue Feb 11 Graphical User Interface RECEN EE E EE NENNEN 11 26 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation M Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 25 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Lab Information Lab Information In this lab you will Edit Rule files Run Calibre DRC from the command line Run Calibre LVS from the command line View reports View results databases Launch RVE from the command line 11 27 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Lab Command Line Calibre In this lab you will perform some of the same tasks as in previous labs onl
268. nd Ground Net Discrepancies sess 8 29 Using Special Tools Targeting Power and Ground Nets sussse 8 30 Identifying Power Ground Texting Problems eese 8 3 Example Simple VDD to VSS Short c ccccc ccccccseccesccccssescacsccssevscnccseecessuscencs 8 32 BumbVs Wiliout ABORT x30 7 95 s etedeti siti cote E QU Decem c iade 8 33 Highlight the VDD Net in the Layout Editor eese 8 34 What is LVS ISOLATE SHORTS odas tci o ro petet eine bie edes ues 8 35 set Up LVS Isolate Shorts 5 endete een ied eet t Et eb bi ta eR e poet oe these eds 8 36 Run LVS with Short Isolation sass ooa dto rye rtr Cor rte aa rima 8 37 Isolate Shorts Using DRC RVE 3 ed rete ees eH route Pe pore POx HEURE 8 38 Isolating the Short in the Layout All Segments Highlighted 8 39 Segment 3 smp The Short auc icon otto odeeib das aset oie soie esee 8 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev xiii June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont Troubleshooting Supply Problems Summary cccccccecescceeesteeceeeneeeeensees 8 41 Lab Ta ETA EO Fa ice ecco Donee ten elc ebd Nee coin Qu me ee dluara o A odia Dole cR Ebr ded ibit 8 42 Lab Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens essere 8 43 Exercise 8 1 Troubleshooting an Open 1 tertie ttt etn tetro do Ibin dde aed 8 44 Exercise 8 2 Troubleshooting a Short eese eet eterne re
269. nder the Server tab is the socket number The socket number determines which TCP IP socket DESIGNrev will use to communicate 1 Additional socket information Sharing data between Calibre DESIGNrev and any other application re quires establishing a connection between them using sockets and TCP IP protocol Sockets are essentially ad dresses to which messages and data can be sent One application the server owns the address The other the client sends messages to that address The Calibre DESIGNrev revision tool selects a default socket for com municating with other applications If that socket 1s busy it finds an available one However if you intend to share data with another application that is already running you must know the socket number that application is using 1 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction with Calibre Interactive and Calibre RVE In general the socket number should not require editing 3 Leave the socket as the default number unless the instructor tells you otherwise 4 Display the Tools tab R M M M s i Calibre Interactive Calibre DRC on Cell labi W Calibre LYS on Cell lab1 Calibre PEX on Cell labi J Calibre RYE Options Multi layer Highlights Alternate view cell The Multi layer highlight option allows multiple layers to be created for highl
270. net Using Calibre with DESIGNrev A 13 June 2004 Appendix A LVS Report Examples RR NAND4 unmatched gate Transistors 36 121 875 243 000 32 113 875 243 000 29 105 875 243 000 26 97 875 243 000 176 121 625 280 000 172 113 625 280 000 169 105 625 280 000 166 97 625 280 000 cenadsentedpezcaezesteexsenemceeennewesenueeeLtzt estneece2ccsLe2ceneeececaeue NAND4 unmatched gate Transistors 51 161 875 243 000 48 153 875 243 000 45 145 875 243 000 41 137 875 243 000 191 161 625 280 000 188 153 625 280 000 185 145 625 280 000 181 137 625 280 000 nlan2lliz2en2tolon2clhlonotenz2edentelenlet2eloiozheil2el2ll2lelel2eloLoenzcwlll2l2hlle NAND2 unmatched gate Transistors 38 129 875 31 000 35 121 875 31 000 178 129 625 68 000 175 121 625 68 000 Ligac2l2np2eclslonz znzacelatceze2 2ecod cloenc2eenz2c2dkl2s2e2l22ln22lzlnlzeciz NAND2 unmatched gate Transistors 47 153 875 31 000 44 145 875 31 000 187 153 625 68 000 184 145 625 68 000 Sp SSL esos steel eee et ee eee eee ee ee NAND2 unmatched gate Transistors 93 273 875 31 000 89 265 875 31 000 233 273 625 68 000 229 265 625 68 000 ee E E E E NAND2 unmatched gate Transistors 96 285 875 31 000 100 293 875 31 000 236 285 625 68 000 240 293 625 68 000 n EAA RAAo e t i NAND2 unmatched gate Transistors 129 373 875 31 000 132 381 875 31 000
271. nner IS MultiBoard IS Optimizer IS Synthesizer iSolve IV locity Language Neutral Licensing Latium LAYOUT LNL LBIST LBISTArchitect Le Lcore Leaf Cell Toolkit Led LED Layout Leonardo Leonardolnsi ght LeonardoS pectrum Librarian Library Builder LineSim amp Logic Analyzer on a Chip Logic Builder Logical Cable LogicLib logio Lsim Lsim DS M Lsim Gate LsimNet Lsim Power Analyst Lsim Review Lsim Switch Lsim XL Mach PA Mach TA Manu facture View Manufacturing Advisor Manufacturing Cable MaskCompose MBIST MBISTArchitect MBIST Full Speed MBIST Flex MBIST In Place MBIST Manager MCM Designer MCM Station MDV MegaFunction Memory Builder Memory Builder Conductor Memory Builder Mozart Memory Designer Memory Model Builder Mentor Mentor Graphics MicroPlan MicroRoute Microtec Mixed Signal Pro ModelEditor ModelSim ModelSim LN ModelSim VHDL ModelSim VLOG Model Sim SE ModelStation Model Technology Model Viewer Model ViewerPlus MODGEN Monet Mslab Msview MS Analyzer MS Architect MS Express MSIMON Nanokernal NetCheck NETED Nucleus Nucleus All You Need Opsim OutNet P amp RIntegrator PACKAGE PADS PARADE ParallelRoute Autocells ParallelRoute MicroRoute Part Foundry Parts S peciaList PathLink PCB Gen PCB Generator PCB IGES PCB Mechanical Interface PCI Express PDLSim PE G MAC PE MAC Personal Learning Program Physical Cable Physical Test Manager SITE PLA Lcompil
272. ns j Multi layer Highlights Choose Runset File Runset File Path Create new runset or load runset E Js iE 3 14 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes What is a runset A runset is a text file created by Calibre Interactive that stores the settings you specify in the Calibre DRC and LVS windows Runset files only show the settings you make that are different from the default settings Runsets increase the reusability and repeatability of Calibre runs by guaranteeing consistent inputs Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 11 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Enter Layout Information How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Enter Layout Information Calibrelnteractive DRC Ele Transcript Setup Hierarchical Hierarchical GSDII file Layout Files Juserisallyw calibre using calbr ab2 1ab2 gds i Im po rt layo ut _4 Import layout database from layout viewer Pri Cell llab2 Primary cell mary of fee name Check area Notice when input turns from red to green 3 16 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Import layout database from layout viewer option discussion If this option is checked Calibre will take a snapshot of contents of the database viewer and write a new GDSII file to the filename specified
273. nte aae no ena 8 51 Exercise 8 3 Troubleshooting a Circuit with both Shorts and Opens 8 59 Exercise 8 4 Troubleshooting a Power to Ground Short sss 8 66 Module 9 Device Recognition s s de eee deerat tuin eoe uy eras eden Ya NEP EEER E e Sega YER E ORE EDI EE EE EER EN dE ECKE eda 9 1 RISC UI Hv saeicatir esa usin domain eos sant cov ceeded nae ne A 9 1 Prerequisites for Calibre Device Extraction cccssesesssesserccsssneccsessecescees 9 2 Example Device Layer Derivation 42 5 5 9 2 2 rot reto retro reete ett oso ees iu uie 9 3 Review ofthe Device Statement ose crier ttr redi e be i t eer D ast 9 4 Example Device Statements anon one on se optet reb bo estote dieu ad aiat 9 5 Associating Layout Devices to Source Components sss 9 6 How Calibre Recognizes Logic Gates in the Layout eseeeeeess 9 11 Examples of Recognizable Simple CMOS Gates sse 9 12 Property Tracing Overview oxensbattepreso vedi decenter entis petuled i od dexe eo Cuodt Dead anes 9 13 TRACE PROPERTY Statement cor eeeee teneo rep Fury ts ratus c eeu e eese vs 9 4 Key TRACE PROPERTY Statement Parameters eee 9 15 TRACE PROPERTY Examples 55 5 2 dh porte at t lebe t haeo VAS 9 16 Reducing Parallel MOS Transistors esses eene 9 17 Reducing Series MOS Transistors 2 s cade Renee eto Eres cbe t din 9 18 What Other Devices are Reducib
274. ntents of the lab10 directory You should see at a minimum the following eight files lab10 gds lab10 revl gds labl0a rules labl0b rules lab10c rules golden rules lab10 runset txt layer props txt If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev SMGC_HOME bin calibredrv Now you will load the GSDII file 4 Choose Menu File gt Open Layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 19 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics 5 Select file lab10 gds 6 Choose OPEN This loads the layout design you will be using for this exercise 7 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties The DESIGNrev window should look similar to below Calibre DESIGNrev ES lol xl File Edit View Layer Object Tools Options Macros Help d E p Z 3 2 xv m Ae E A Z All BACK Fort Ruler Select Move Box Poly Vertex Notch A bookmarks a layouts vw none best o ref poly 9 edge y vrix g text Layers lt lt lt 544 736 462 000 gt Layers ER UZ Show Hide o 450228 177610 db 450 228 177 610 um Layout lab10 gds Cell lab10 Depth O Grid off 8 From DESIGNrev choose Menu Tools gt Calibre Interactive This opens the Calibre Interactive Server dialog box 9 In the dialog box select Calibre DRC 10 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Mo
275. ntire flattened design 2 Devices in this Cell FDC The number of devices in this cell when its entire contents are flattened Flat Device Count 3 Total Device Contrib 1 x 2 The number of devices this cell contributes to the total flat device count 4 Total Device Contrib 3 TFDC 100 Column 3 represented as a percentage of total flat device count With Hcells the following columns present statistics taking into account the current hcells and automatch setting 5 Instances of this Cell The number of times the cell is instantiated within all existing hcells always 1 for an hcell 6 Instances in this Cell HIC The number of instances that would be in this cell if all non hcells inside it were expanded Hierarchical Instance Count 7 Total Instance Contrib 5 x 6 The number of instances this cell contributes to the total hierarchical instance count 8 Total Instance Contrib 7 THIC 100 Column 7 represented as a percentage of total hierarchical instance count 9 Memory Savings Expected memory savings if this cell is used as an hcell 10 Cell Name Cell names designates leaf cells all contents are devices designates current hcells designates cells with the same name in layout and source 4 designates cells that would match via placementmatch 10 Cell Name leaf cell hcell same name same placements pins lt Flat
276. ntor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 3 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics How to Find Net Area Ratio How to Find Net Area Ratio Use the NET AREA RATIO statement to find potentially bad antennas NET AREA RATIO layer layern dlayer gt value NET AREA RATIO performs these steps e Sums the area of all layer layern shapes on the same net numerator e Sums the area of all dlayer shapes connected to that net denominator e Computes the ratio of the numerator divided by the denominator NAR e Outputs copies of all ayer1 shapes belonging to nets with a NAR greater than the specified value Output can be viewed just like any regular DRC result Consult the SVRF manual for additional NET AREA RATIO options 10 5 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Antenna Rule Example Antenna Rule Example This simple antenna rule considers shapes on three layers of interconnect poly metal1 amp metal2 antenna level2 Ratio of area of poly metall metal2 on same net to area of gates formed by poly must be lt 50 gate poly and oxide x net area ratio metal1 metal2 poly gate gt 50 y net area ratio poly metall metaD gate gt 50 z net area ratio metal2 poly metall gate gt 50 x or y orz j NET AREA RATIO statement used three t
277. of a cell a Click on the by labl in the Cells tree H ce This expands to give the hierarchy list of all the cells in the labl cell Ehabi al220 a1230 al240 a1310 al520 al720 a2311 a8500 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 45 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction b Click on a1720 in the cell hierarchy list hal Hierarchy This jumps you into cell 31720 where you can both view and edit the cell s internal layout c Click on labl in the cell hierarchy list to return to the full design 4 Displaying lower higher in the context 1 46 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction a Choose Menu View gt Change Hierarchy Depth gt Increase To Depth Default Depth Increase This displays the layout structures one level lower in the hierarchy You cannot edit the contents of cells at this level but you can see the underlying structure and avoid creating shorts etc b Choose Menu View gt Change Hierarchy Depth gt Decrease To Depth Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 47 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction This returns to only displaying the structures at the upper level of the hierarchy Go directly to a level in the hierarchy by typing the desired level number For example 0 is the top level and 1 is the level just Note below the top level Do not use the 10 key numeric pad Only use the regular alphanumberic keys when typing these numbe
278. of a layout net matches the source but the two net names do not match e This behavior also applies to ports e LVS reports no discrepancies if the circuit connectivity matches regardless of incorrect user given names EXAMPLE e A netis named RESET in the source circuit but is named RST in the layout Calibre issues a warning message but does not generate any error messages The connectivity does match the source e How to fix the problem correct the name in the layout 5 19 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 5 18 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting Example Report of Unmatched Text Names Example Report of Unmatched Text Names coo T INFORMATION AND WARNINGS dkkdkdkkdAxkdkkdAk amp d4d4 kx kkkkkkkkkkkdAk4AkkkkkkkAkkkAkd4d4tkkkkkd4knkkkkdd4kkkkkdAk4Akkkkdkd44kkkkkkd4znknkkkkktn4Aktkkkk44tn4A Matched Matched Unmatched Unmatched Component Layout Source Layout Source Type Ports ie ie 0 ie Nets 63 63 0 ia Instances 2 Be 0 ie al220 5 5 0 0 al230 4 4 0 0 a1240 3 3 0 ie 3 3 0 0 T Ji 0 0 10 10 6 0 Total Inst o Layout Names That Are Missing In The Source Nets RST 5 20 Using Calibre Texting Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 19 June 2004 Module 5 Texting How to Identify Incorrectly Placed Text in the Layout How to Identify Incorrectly Placed
279. on Example Resistor named res DEVICE R res metall pos metal2 neg 1 1 Resistor with resistivity defined at 1 1 Ohms square 2 6 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Notice the two different types of comments comments are regular comments comments will also appear in the Check Text window of RVE 2 4 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What about Case Sensitivity What about Case Sensitivity By default all uppercase letters are converted to lowercase for internal purposes you can define as needed Keywords are always case insensitive Names are case insensitive unless used for cell or file names Layer names RuleCheck names etc are always case insensitive File names are always case sensitive UNIX User defines case sensitivity in Calibre e LAYOUT CASE Specifies whether the layout should be processed in a case sensitive manner e SOURCE CASE Specifies whether the source should be processed in a case sensitive manner e LVS COMPARE CASE Controls case sensitivity in the LVS circuit comparison stage 2 7 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes SOURCE CASE Example e Original name Reset e If SOURCE CASE yes then Reset e f SOURCE CASE no then reset Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 5 June 2004 Module 2 Calibr
280. ontributes to the total hierarchical instance count 8 Total Instance Contrib 7 THIC 100 Column 7 represented as a percentage of total hierarchical instance count 9 Memory Savings Expected memory savings if this cell is used as an hcell 10 Cell Name Cell names designates leaf cells all contents are devices designates current hcells designates cells with the same name in layout and source 4 designates cells that would match via placementmatch lt Flat gt lt With Hcells gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Instances Devices Total Total Instances Instances Total Total Cell Name of this in this Device Device of this in this Instance Instance Memory leaf cell Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Cell Cell Contrib Contrib Savings hcell FDC 1 x 2 3 TFDC HIC 5 x 6 7 THIC same name 4 same placements pins 4 8 32 11 4 8 32 23 14 a1240 5 6 30 11 5 6 30 22 14 d a1230 3 6 18 6 4 3 6 18 13 6 5 a1620 3 2 6 2l 3 2 6 4 3 0 7 a1310 1 280 280 100 0 1 124 124 90 0 0 lab7b 10 10 100 36 1 10 10 Tig 0 0 a2311 22 4 88 31 1 4 4 2 9 0 0 a1220 1 6 6 25 1 6 6 4 3 0 0 a1720 140 53 MN 140 53 MP Devices Cell Name in this Cel 280 lab7b level 0 4 a1220 x10 level 1 MN x2 level 2 MP x2 level 2 6 a1230 x5 level 1 MN x3 level 2 MP x3 level 2 8 a1240 x4 lev
281. opics How to Compare Two Layout Versions How to Compare Two Layout Versions The next several slides will discuss Calibre s dual database capabilities Dual database overview Specifying the second layout database Bumping layer numbers from the second database Reconciling cell name changes between layout versions 9 9 10 13 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 10 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics Dual Database Capabilities Dual Database Capabilities Calibre has the capability to compare two separate layout databases This is known as Layout vs Layout or LVL LVL comparison requires the following specification statements to be included in the rule file e LAYOUT SYSTEM2 e LAYOUT PATH2 e LAYOUT PRIMARY2 e LAYOUT BUMP2 10 14 Using Calibre Additional Topics Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 13 June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics LVL Comparison 10 15 Notes 10 14 LVL Comparison Use LAYOUT SYSTEM LAYOUT PATH and LAYOUT PRIMARY statements or use the GUI fields in the usual way to specify the first layout Use LAYOUT SYSTEM2 LAYOUT PATH2 and LAYOUT PRIMARY2 statements to specify the second layout Use LAYOUT BUMP2 to specify an increment for all layout2 layer numbers see next slide Use LAYOUT RENAME CELL to map
282. or Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 29 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Read the DRC Summary Report Hierarchical and Flat Counts How to Read the DRC Summary Report Hierarchical and Flat Counts What do the numbers in mean For hierarchical runs the number in is the equivalent count for a flat run DRC Summary Report dre summary File Edit Options Windows TOTAL Original Geometry Count 7 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 238 a 3 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 26 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 70 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 119 TOTAL Original Geometry Count 189 RULECHECK RESULTS STATISTICS RULECHECK min_poly_width TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min metall width TOTAL Result Count RULECHECK min metal2 width TOTAL Result Count LA EN Row 1 coll i Flat DRC runs do not have data in 3 33 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Use the DRC Results Database ASCII How to Use the DRC Results Database ASCIl You can manually File Viewer user sallyw calibre using c read the results File Edit Options Windows Rule File Pathname golden rules database Minimum pwell spacing 1 min spacing metall 0 0 2 Nov 21 09 27 13 2002 Rule File Pathname golden rules min spacing metal2 1 1 2 Nov 2
283. or all objects in the Layout and Source this discrepancy should make sense to you It is telling you that the two nets labelled 150 and N 125 in the layout when taken together seem to match Source net N 125 Another way of looking at it is that layout net 150 matches part of source net N 125 and layout net N 125 matches the rest of source net N 125 Or two layout nets matcha single source net This is an open circuit in the layout Now you could go back to the interactive debugging environment knowing that you were looking for an open circuit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LVS PARAMETERS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Aside Skip over this information to the INFORMATION AND WARNINGS section o LVS Setup Component Type Properties phy_comp element comp Subtype Property model Pin Name Properties phy_pin Power Net Names VDD Ground Net Names VSS Ignore Ports NO All Capacitor Pins Swappable NO Reduce Parallel Mos Transistors YES Recognize Gates YES Recognize Only Simple Gates NO Reduce Split Gates YES Reduce Parallel Bipolar Transistors YES Reduce Series Capacitors YES Reduce Parallel Capacitors YES Reduce Series Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Resistors YES Reduce Parallel Diodes YES Filter Unused Mos Transistors NO Filter Unused Bipolar Transistors NO Report List Limit 50 o Numeric Trace Properties
284. ort to Layout A 3 44 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 39 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Lab Information Notes 3 40 Lab Information In this lab you will Run Calibre DRC View a summary report Invoke RVE Highlight discrepancies Correct errors Check the corrections import data from layout editor 3 46 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Lab Basic DRC Introduction Several of the procedural steps in this lab contain more simplified instructions because you have performed similar steps in the first lab New procedures will be fully explained In this lab you will you will again run a flat Calibre DRC verification of a layout This time Calibre DRC will find several results errors When the verification completes you will view the results by reading the ASCII DRC Summary Report file and using Calibre RVE to highlight the error in a layout tool After you find all the errors in the layout you will correct at least one of the errors run Calibre DRC on the modified layout and again check the results with Calibre RVE By doing this lab you perform an entire iteration of checking a layout making corrections and verifying the corrections List of Exercises Exercise 3 1 Setup and Run Calibre DRC Exercise 3 2
285. otes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 9 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Unique Features Example Unique Features Example OK BETTER ENCLOSURE Cont M1 2 ENCLOSURE Cont M1 2 OUTSIDE ALSO NOT INSIDE Cont M1 Poly FA m Cont 2 12 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Data Reduction Example Data Reduction Example Speed up DRC by reducing data fed into individual checks OK Better A SIZE M1 BY A SIZE M1 BY 5 WIDEM1 SIZE A BY 5 WIDEM1 SIZE A BY 5 B SIZE M1 BY 40 B SIZE WIDEM1 BY 40 PADM1 SIZE B BY 40 PADM1 SIZE B BY 40 Process Process all all of M1 twice of M1 once Process a subset of M1 WIDEM1 2 13 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes This example is not a trade off between rule concurrency and rule efficiency Size is not one of the operations that can run concurrently Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 11 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Combining Data Reduction and Unique Features Example Combining Data Reduction and Unique Features Example Can get even better results by using all available techniques OK A SIZE M1 BY 5 WIDEM1 SIZE A BY 5 B SIZE M1 BY 40 PADM1 SIZE B BY 40 Better A SIZE M1 B
286. ound and resolved arbitrarily LAYOUT CELL NAME labSa SOURCE CELL NAME a E S BN Row i4 cofi 8 11 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Identifying Shorts Using the LVS Report Cont Identifying Shorts Using the LVS Report Cont How dol tell if I should start looking for a short or an open e Does the Source or Layout have more nets e Check the Initial number of Objects report e source nets gt layout nets therefore most likely a short e Calibre matches two Source nets to one Layout net File Viewer user sallyw calibre using_calbr lab5 lvs_shorts Fle Edit Options Windows INITIAL NUMBERS OF OBJECTS Component Type Instances 4 pins 4 pins M Total Inst DU aai aane Pod EN Row ii4 cof 8 12 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 11 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Using RVE Tracking Shorts Using RVE Display the first discrepancy 8 13 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Using RVE Tracking
287. own calibre drc hier lab4 rules Calibre v9 1 9 4 Thu Dec 19 14 04 47 PST 2002 Litho Libraries v9 1 9 2 Fri Dec 6 12 47 01 PST 2002 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2002 AL Rights Reserved THIS WORK CONTAINS TRADE SECRET AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION OR ITS LICENSORS AND IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE TERMS Mentor Graphics software executing under Sun SPARC Solaris Running on Sun0S sundown 5 7 Generic_106541 08 sungu Starting time Tue Feb 11 11 31 33 2003 Running on 1 CPU if if if if if if if if if if if if if if j CALIBRE DRC H Tue Feb 11 11 31 33 2003 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 11 21 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Transcript Command Line Calibre DRC Example Scan Transcript 11 23 Notes 11 22 Terminal Layer oxide DELETED LVHEAP 0 3 3 Layer poly DELETED LVHEAP 0 3 3 TURITE to ASCII DRC Results Database lab4 hier db COMPLETED DRC RuleCheck min ext oxide poly COMPLETED Number of Results 1 3 e 0 mer RED Gae TWO LAYER DRC Time PU 0 REAL 0 CALIBRE DRC H EXECUTIVE MODULE COMPLETED CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 TOTAL RULECHECKS EXECUTED 11 TOTAL RESULTS GENERATED 2 1 3 DRC RESULTS DATABASE FILE lab4 hier db ASCII CALIBRE DRC H COMPLETED Tue reb 11 11 31 3
288. ox Choose Find Acrobat will search through the document until it finds that particular string of words Choose Find Again to search for additional occurrences of the word When you are done experimenting with the search feature close the Find dialog box Experiment searching for other words or phrases until you are comfortable with the basics of the documentation Viewer tool When you are done close all Acrobat windows Close all Calibre windows except DESIGNrev You do not need to save the runset Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 43 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 1 44 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Exercise 1 5 Experiment with DESIGNrev In this exercise you will learn how to perform some very simple operations in Calibre DESIGNrev There are multiple ways to perform any task in DESIGNrev In this lab most tasks will be done using the Toolbar or mouse button RMB or LMB commands whenever possible In this exercise nothing you are going to do is exacting You are just to experiment with the tool You may view any area select any polygon change or move any shape All illustrations are just references to how your layout might look Anything you do in this exercise will have no bearing on future labs 1 Make the DESIGNrev window active 2 Click on the Z All toolbar icon This displays the whole design and places you at a good starting point 3 Displaying the contents
289. pletion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e Troubleshoot malformed devices using Calibre LVS e Troubleshoot mis connected devices using Calibre LVS e Troubleshoot properties in the Source and Layout Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 1 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Prerequisites for Calibre Device Extraction Prerequisites for Calibre Device Extraction Prerequisites e Add shapes to original drawn layers e Add layer constructor and layer selector operations to the rule file to generate derived layers NOTE some layer operations preserve connectivity e Add device statements to the rule file to specify which derived layers can form devices Connectivity is important e Power supply connections are part of gate recognition e No power supply connections no gate recognition Calibre LVS extracts devices in the layout recognized by the device statements 9 3 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Example Device Layer Derivation Example Device Layer Derivation LAYER PWELL LAYER OXIDE LAYER POLY LAYER NPLUS ORIGINAL LAYERS Un A N PAREA OXIDE AND PWELL NGATE POLY AND PAREA NOX OXIDE AND NPLUS NSD NOX NOT NGATE LAYER CONSTRUCTORS PWELL OUT OXIDE POLY ais s VSS NPLUS yss 9 4 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 M
290. polygons All 4 Count 4096 Run DRC Older versions of Calibre Interactive do not offer the Output cell errors in cell space option If your version of Calibre does not Note have this option you will need to add the line DRC CELL NAME YES CELL SPACE XFORM to the lab4 rule file You will also need to save and load the updated rule file 6 Choose Run DRC 4 30 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics The error tree should look similar to below How is this display different from the previous error trees To make all your viewing options available all the time you need to make highlighting in context the default You can then turn it off when desired 7 In RVE choose Menu Setup gt Options This opens the Setup DRC RVE Options dialog box 8 Choose the View tab 9 From the Highlight menu settings drop down menu select Highlight in Context Setup DRC RVE Options Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 31 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 10 11 12 13 14 15 Choose Apply Choose OK to close the Setup DRC RVE Options dialog box In the RVE window select Menu Highlight gt Highlight in Context Open the RVE error tree for cell a1310 Select the error E amp 13 Errors in 4 of 11 Checks X Cell a1220 1 Error BE Cell a1310 1 Error Check min ext oxide poly 1 Error Lo E Cell a1620 1 Error
291. ps even if you already know how to perform the base operation For example 1 Go outside a Exit the room through the rear door of the classroom b Walk left down the hall c Turn right at the T d Make a right at the elevators e Exit through the front doors of the building If you already know how to go outside you can just go outside If you do not know or remember how to get outside you could follow the lettered steps to get there Notice that even though you know how to get outside you might not have gone out through the front doors so it would still be a good idea to skim the lettered steps to make sure you end up at the expected place e Inthe early exercises all steps are provided Once you have done a task you will simply be told to do it with maybe a little reminder of how it was done e You should leave the tools up and running as you move from exercise to exercise The exercises usually build on each other On the other hand you can close the tools after a lab full block of exercises If you are Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 23 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction specifically told to close a tool or application between exercises you should do so e Ifyou ever have any problems or questions about a lab feel free to ask your instructor for help List of Exercises Exercise 1 1 Invoke DESIGNREV Exercise 1 2 Launch Calibre DRC and LVS Interactive Exercise 1 3 View a Discrepancy w
292. queuing for a license if one is not available 11 17 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 11 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What Optional Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS Cont What Command Line Switches are Available for Calibre LVS Cont cs This switch instructs Calibre LVS to read and verify the Spice netlist specified in the Source Path specification statement Calibre LVS issues any applicable warnings or errors and also writes them to the LVS report cl This switch instructs Calibre LVS to read and verify the Spice netlist specified in the Layout Path specification statement Calibre LVS issues any applicable warnings or errors and also writes them to the LVS report Additional options are available for Flat LVS runs See the Calibre User s Manual for additional information 11 18 Using Calibre Command Line Calibre Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 17 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Saving the Transcript Saving the Transcript From the UNIX shell calibre drc rule file tee ic log Runs in the foreground spawn a background process to capture the transcript in the file ic log calibre drc rule file gt ic log amp Run calibre in the background capture the transcript in the file ic
293. r AutoLink AutoLogic AutoLogic BLOCKS AutoLogic FPGA AutoLogic VHDL AutomotiveLib AutoPAR 9 AutoTherm AutoTherm Duo Auto ThermMC M Auto View Autowire Station AXEL AXEL Symbol Genie AX GMAC BISTArchitect BLAST Blaze BlazeRouter Board Station Consumer Board Architect Board Designer Board Layout Board Process Library BoardSim Board Station BOLD Administrator BOLD Browser BOLD Composer Bridgepoint BSDArchitect BSPBuilder Buy on Demand Cable Analyzer Cable Station CAECO Designer CAEFORM Calibre Calibre DRC Calibre DRC H Calibre DESIG Nrev Calibre CB Calibre FRACTURER Calibre FRACTURE Calibre FRACTUREm Calibre FRACTURE Calibre FRACTUREK Calibre LITHOview Calibre LVS H Calibre MT flex Calibre OPCsbar Calibre OPCpro Calibre ORC Calibre PRINTimage Calibre PS Mgate Calibre PSMcheck Calibre TDope Calibre WOR Kbench Calibre RVE Calibre MGC Calibre Interactive Calibre MDPview Calibre xRC Capitali Capital Analysis Capital Archive Capital Bridges Capital Documents Capital H Capital H the complete desktop engineer Capital Harness Capital Harness Systems Capital Insight Capital Integration Capital Manager Capital Manufacture Capital Support Capital Systems Capture Station Celaro Cell Builder Cell Station CellFloor CellGen Cell Graph CellPlace CellPower CellRoute Centricity CEOC ChaseX CheckMate CHEOS Chip Station ChipGraph ChipLister Circuit PathFinder Co Veri fi
294. r Interface launched from Calibre DESIGNrev Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 1 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Course Objectives Course Objectives At the completion of this course you will be able to Run DRC checks using Calibre DRC Run LVS checks using Calibre LVS Read and understand various Calibre reports Use DRC RVE and LVS RVE to help find discrepancies in the layout Explain some of Calibre extended capabilities 1 2 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation DESIGNrev Notes DRC Design Rule Checking RVE Results Viewing Environment References There are several on line manuals that you will find useful throughout this class The file name is in parentheses after the title e Calibre Verification Bookcase _bk_calbr pdf e Calibre Verification User s Manual calbr_user pdf Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction e Standard Verification Rule Format SVRF Manual svrf ur pdf e Calibre DESIGNrev User s Manual calbr_drv_user pdf All these manuals are located in the MGC HOME shared pdfdocs directory Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction Objectives for This Module Objectives for This Module At the completion of this lecture and lab you will be able to Explain how Calibre fits into an IC design flow Select which Calibre tool to use for which job Name the Calibre
295. r previous highlights option Layout labSa gds Cel labS Depth O Grid o 13 Using RVE display all the information for discrepancy 1 14 Double click on the layout net 55 Notice that the net highlights in the Netlist and in the layout viewer 15 Display the details for the second discrepancy 16 Double click on layout net RESET The problem should be somewhere within these highlights Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 33 June 2004 Module 5 Texting 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 34 What are the Layout and Source Netlist lines containing RESET Source Layout There is a problem the layout instance does not even have the correct number of pins Double click on X17 in the Source netlist This will highlight its match in the Layout netlist and in the layout itself Which instance matches X17 in the layout Since RESET is common to both the Source and the Layout finding RESET is a good starting point Next you will return to the layout and see if you can find where RESET is currently attached First you will need to erase the highlights to make it easier to see what you are doing Choose the Eraser icon from the RVE Toolbar Make the DESIGNrev window active Zoom into the display so it is easy to see the instances involved in the discrepancy Choose Menu Object gt Find Text This opens the Find Text dialo
296. ral a d iii About This Training Workbook cer eeee esee ee eerte nennen eere o nest ee tn nota sno xix ANUS Bee osos ace cheeks eo tede tede oae caer eae EE teet croak te XIX Prerequisite Knowledge 0 ie bm em bt nire esi auod ceo X1X DESIGNrev as a Background Process csscccssscsssetecssssesssscesseecesseccsssescennes XX Slide Numbers in the Workbook eee eee XX Custom Class Lab Numbering udin eet teeo eti to estu Da ede bee ever vue XX Module 1 Introd uCtIOI 5e esee reri oe be Decade eret eee eco La erar a erar ele senate 1 1 Ie VAS MENTI 1 1 Cours Objectives seismise datei aed ic teiuaet SUN Media idet oti Reed etudes 1 2 COUTSE schetule dde utei ere on Len ete colonies rent t rU eM e Le MEME 1 4 Objectives for This Mole aio reru em eds prep che bete aont Pee vec 1 5 What Flows Include Calibre 4 2 uaesiskta stesura er arl eb oe Pe d 1 6 IC Design and Layout Verification Flow essere 1 7 Layout Verification Process Flow for DRC esee 1 8 Layout Verification Process Flow for LVS sssssssseeeeeeener ees 1 9 Mask Manipulation Process Flow ccccccccccssscccessseseceeceesessseceeceeesenseaeeceseeas 1 10 What are the Various Calibre Tools eeeeeeeeee eene 1 11 Useful Abbreviations oreet eret Fea d e ei KO kk Ed Pob OR E nr 1 12 What is the Difference Between Hierarchical and Flat and Why Should IC ate esee EE P
297. rcises you should now see four violations reported as results in the RVE window The fourth violation involves an incorrect PMOS gate length rule min pgate length Select this 2 48 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF RuleCheck in the RVE window and click on the H icon to highlight the violation in the layout Your display should look like this Calibre DRC RVE a1220 drc results Hle View Highlight Setup e 4 H Z E BE 4 Errors in 4 of 12 Checks El Cell a1220 4 Errors Check min metall width 1 Error Check min spacing metall 1 Err Check min ext oxide poly 1 Er eee pgate length 1 Error Riu Checktext Rule File Pathname lab2 rules Minimum PMOS gate length is 1 75 micrc E 13 Optional If there is time using the Layout Editor correct any of the identified layout rule violations and re run DRC to verify your fix Hint is for DESIGNrev only Hint Edge selection is useful here When you are finished with this lab close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC RVE and Summary Report Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 49 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to e List the files required for a Calibre DRC run e Perform a simple Calibre DRC
298. ready to write some TRACE PROPERTY statements Use the lecture notes and the SVRF Manual if you need help with the syntax 11 Write a statement comparing the NMOS widths in the Source and Layout Answer What is the tolerance in the above rule statement 12 Bea little generous and change the rule statement to include a tolerance of 2 Answer 13 Write a rule to compare the NMOS lengths and flag any 2 difference between the Source and the Layout Answer 9 38 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 14 Write a rule to compare the resistance of the resistors in the source and layout flagging any difference greater than 5 Answer 15 Change the above rule so only the poly pl resistors are checked Answer 16 Write a rule that flags 5 tolerance of the capacitance for the NMOS nmos capacitors Answer 17 Open the rule file lab9_trace_rules for editing 18 Add these four additional rule statements to the rule file 19 Save the rule file 20 Run LVS again What are your results What component has the error It is beyond the scope of this class to fix this error 21 If you like you may experiment tracing various properties with different tolerances Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 39 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition 22 You may also experiment with the design from the previous exercise 23 When you are done erase all highlights 24 Close all Calibre related
299. red polygon The unselected polygon will loose its highlight 12 Moving Polygons a Select the polygon s b Choose the Move icon from the Toolbar Menu c Hold down the LMB d Drag the polygon s to their new location You do not need to have the cursor directly over the selected items i to move them The selected items will move relative to the cursor Note Please experiment with this feature so you understand how the move function operates e Release the LMB Notice that your polygon s are still selected after the move operation f Undo the move by selecting Menu Edit gt Undo Move For the rest of the steps in this exercise you may want to work in an empty area of the layout 13 Making a box a Choose the Box icon from the Toolbar Menu 1 54 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction b Select the desired layer from the layer palette The layer number highlights when selected c Click at a starting point for the box 45 200 bu 28 300 P End Here Start Here d Click at the ending point Opposite diagonal YW a Choose the Poly icon from the Toolbar Menu 14 Making a polygon b Select the desired layer from the layer palette The layer number highlights when selected c Click at the starting point d Click at each vertex End Here Start Here e Double click to complete the polygon Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 55 June 2004
300. rements for network connectivity but can lead to unsatisfactory circuit performance 6 13 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 12 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Soft Connections Example Soft Connections Example Ifthe rule file contains these lines CONNECT METALI WELLTIE BY CONTACT CONNECT WELL WELLTIE Then Calibre sees a connection between the two metal paths through the high resistance WELL The missing hardwire connection between the two metal paths is not detected circuit fails 6 14 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 6 13 Module 6 Connectivity What is STAMP Notes What is STAMP Derives new layer by selecting all layer polygons overlapped by layer2 polygons a copy of the layer1 shape is put into stamped layer Syntax stamp layer STAMP layer1 BY layer2 ABUT ALSO STAMP operations are executed after CONNECT operations Passes established connectivity from the ayer2 polygons onto the generated stamp_layer polygons one directional Warns of multiple overlapping polygons from different nets e STAMP violations generally result in a large number of errors e Does not create a copy of the layer polygon in stamp layer e Lookin the vs report ext file for details Warns of no overlapping polygons floating aye
301. rev 8 49 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens 22 Highlight just net 6 Wf se a SN INNNNNNSNI aa 2202 Nd 4 s A NN gum EN i Z N a LYE EA TA al LLLLLLLL PA ch WELLE WOO m This narrows down the problem Can you see the problem Hint This piece of metall would flunk a DRC check 23 OPTIONAL Correct the problem in the layout and run LVS again to check your corrections Make sure you load the corrected design 24 When you are ready to go to the next exercise close all Calibre windows except the Calibre Interactive LVS and DESIGNrev windows 8 50 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Exercise 8 2 Troubleshooting a Short In this lab you will learn how to identify a simple short and find the problem in the layout 1 In DESIGNrev open GDSII file lab8b gds 2 Load the layer properties file layer props txt Menu Layer gt Load Layer Properties 3 In Calibre Interactive LVS change the following Inputs Layout data Layout Files lab8b gds Layout Netlist lab8b layout net 4 Run LVS What are your overall results Looking at the LVS Report what kind of errors do you have 5 Scroll down in the LVS Report until you find the first cell that is incorrect What cell is it Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 51 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens
302. reviations SVRF Standard Verification Rule Format PVX Physical Verification and Extraction RVE Results Viewing Environment SVDB Standard Verification Database LVS results DRC Design Rule Checking LVS Layout Versus Schematic ERC Electrical Rule Checking 1 13 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What is the Difference Between Hierarchical and Flat and Why Should I Care What is the Difference Between Hierarchical and Flat and Why Should I Care Flat Looks at every geometry in every cell Hierarchical Only looks at a single instance of any cell Benefits of using Hierarchical e Minimizes redundant processing Stores analyzes and processes data once per cell instead of once for every cell placement e Uses design database hierarchy to reduce processing time memory usage and DRC result counts e Does not lose lower level to upper level interactions If you have the license you can use hierarchy all the time 1 14 Using Calibre Introduction Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 13 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction What are I Os for DRC and LVS What are I Os for DRC and LVS Inputs e Layout e Logic for LVS e Rules Outputs e DRC Results e SVDB LVS results database e Report e Log Transcript 1 15
303. rf polygons Error locations not reported in LVS locate with DRC rules 6 15 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How to Identify Soft Connections with the STAMP Operator How to Identify Soft Connections with the STAMP Operator If the rule file contains these lines CONNECT METALI WELLTIE BY CONTACT S WELL STAMP WELL BY WELLTIE UNASSIGNED OR VOID NET METAL1 NET 4 METAL1 VSS Then the STAMP operation generates a warning that it is trying to stamp the WELL with two different net IDs This generally results in a huge number of errors in the LVS report file since all devices within WELL are undefined 6 16 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 15 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How to Locate Soft Connections with DRC How to Locate Soft Connections with DRC METAL1 METAL1 VSS CONNECT METAL PTIE BY CONTACT STAMPED_PWELL STAMP PWELL BY PTIE SHOW_BAD_PWELL PWELL NOT STAMPED_PWELL SHOW_BAD_PTIE BADWELL PWELL NOT STAMPED_PWELL PTIE INTERACT BADWELL 6 17 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity What is the SCONNECT Operator What is the SCONN
304. row 16 cofi Study the rule file carefully to answer the following questions Which layers can contribute shapes to antenna nets What information would you expect to find in the golden_rules file 17 Choose Menu File gt Close to close the text window 18 In the Calibre Interactive DRC window Choose the Inputs menu button 19 Ifitis selected unselect the Import layout database from layout viewer option button 10 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 10 Additional Topics The Calibre window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC user sallyw training using_calbr_v_worl Hle Transcript Setup Help Rules Hierarchical Flat Calibre CB Inputs Layout Outputs meom mes pumas SS S Transcript Import layout database from layout viewer Run DRC Primary Cell labi0 Check area FO Ea ad 20 Choose the Run DRC Menu button If you get a message box asking to overwrite layout file lab10 gds i cancel the message box and return to the Input Menu Note button Layout tab Make sure Import layout database from layout viewer is unselected then try running DRC again At the completion of the DRC run the Calibre RVE window will appear 21 Expand the error tree display in the RVE window to show the list of six antenna rule results and select result number 01 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 10 23 June 2004 Module
305. rs 5 Zooming Into an Area a Hold down the right mouse button RMB b Draw a rectangle from upper left to lower right around the area you want to display 1 48 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction c Release the RMB Start Here End Here Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 49 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction When you release the mouse button the surrounding area zooms in to fill the display window E um AINE ESL ES E E D D AA ZZ Bae UU WLLL SE 6 Zooming Out of an Area a Hold down the RMB 1 50 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction b Draw a rectangle from the lower right to the upper left centering around the area that you would like centered in the new display c Release the RMB End Here Start Here Sl a oo EZ LLLA A EZ ZZ LLLA Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 51 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction The size of the rectangle will determine how far the display zooms out The smaller the rectangle the more the display will zoom out The results may be similar to below 77 ZAG EL x a SE 5 Te IC E VOLO PPS un Ra 1777 Ss a MY aS a OOM AA M rer cd AJAZZZZZZ AZZZZZ a a BUMP E S re Lo a n ae a LL a Lll EE reza VALE E FIERE SESS EL z Uh DEALER AAZLLL E Bt 5 a ics fu 7 Centering the display 1 52 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module
306. rtex stretch to correct this error Although the rule states that the minimum poly width is 1 25 measure the width of the other similar poly lines and make the narrow poly line the same width Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Before After Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 67 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC You are now ready to save the file and see if you fixed the problems 18 In RVE choose the Eraser icon bd to erase all current error highlights 3 68 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Exercise 3 4 Run Calibre DRC on the New Layout In this exercise you will run DRC on the new layout and check your fixes You will use the Calibre feature which reads the layout directly from the layout editor rather than needing to write the edited file out to GDSII before making the Calibre run 1 Close the RVE window 2 Return to the Calibre Interactive DRC Window You do not need to re launch Calibre Interactive You can use the existing window 3 Change the following information e Outputs DRC Results Database File lab3_fixed db e Outputs DRC Summary Report File drc report fixed e Inputs Layout File lab3_fixed gds e Inputs Import layout database from layout viewer selected Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 69 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC The Inputs tab of the Calibre Interactive DRC window should look similar to below Hle Transcript
307. sh a common display since you needed to do different amounts of zooming etc to answer the last question in the previous exercise 1 Turn on all highlights in the layout from RVE using Menu Highlight gt Highlight All In the layout viewer set the view to only display the contents of the top cell 2 Choose Menu View gt Change Hierarchy Depth gt Decrement To Depth To change the view to only display the contents of the next cell up in the hierarchy you can also just type lt Do not type the quotes Conversely to display one step lower in the hierarchy type gt You should now be able to see the highlights and just the contents of the top cell 3 Zoom and pan as needed to display the a1720 cell 4 Select the a1720 cell 3 62 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Your display should look similar to the illustration below Note the location of the two highlights When you begin editing the cell these highlights will no longer be visible 5 Choose a1720 from the Cell window Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 63 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC This opens down into the cell in a separate area ZA La A EA j VIKAR A iM fz Gy r li V A N p H NO ANS SAAS KEL RA ERR NES R Z PA ZL LA R re GA Ng l Gy a eA LA AA WLLLLSSSLLLLLLLY LLLA Can you find the two pi
308. sic LVS Concepts 49 50 7 60 You can highlight instances and nets in the layout by selecting them in the schematics Experiment with cross referencing between the netlists and layout until you are comfortable with the mechanics of the operation Using the LVS RVE window clear erase all highlights Make sure to leave all netlist windows and RVE open for use in the next exercise Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Exercise 7 2 Additional LVS RVE Functionality You already know how to display netlists and cross probe between the netlist and the layout In this exercise you will experiment with additional functionary provided by LVS RVE First you will review the functional available from the toolbar 1 Find the function s available from each unique Toolbar icon Hint Use the Query Help or the Calibre Verification User s Manual Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 61 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts In this exercise you will experiment with using the N nets D devices and I instances tools Before you start actively experimenting with the buttons notice that they are two different colors blue and green What does the blue color indicate What does the green color indicate These colors are used consistently to flag layout and source to help you keep track of what information you are seeing Now you are ready to experiment with the toolbar
309. sistors e Capacitor pins unless rule file contains the specification LVS ALL CAPACITOR PINS SWAPPABLE NO e Resistor pins 9 23 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 9 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Identifying a Pin Swap Discrepancy with LVS RVE Identifying a Pin Swap Discrepancy with LVS RVE Cross probe from the Discrepancy Viewer into the netlists Calibre LYS RVE svdb lab7b lab7b lab7 Discrepancy 1 Incorrect Nets 9 24 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright O 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 9 23 June 2004 Module 9 Device Recognition Identifying a Pin Swap Discrepancy with LVS RVE Cont Identifying a Pin Swap Discrepancy with LVS RVE Cont View the two superimposed discrepancies in the layout netlist and source netlist 0 0 0 x 290750 Y 229000 0 x 292250 Y 118000 X 300250 Y 17000 42 a1720 355000 0 0 x 308250 Y 355000 45 a1220 17000 0 0 X 316250 Y 17000 14 a1220 229000 1 180 X 328250 Y 229000 118000 0 0 x 340250 Y 118000 355000 0 0 x 340250 Y 355000 17000 1 180 x 344250 Y 17000 229000 1 180 x 352250 Y 229000 17000 0 0 X 364250 Y 17000 T 407000 229000 1 180 x 382750 y 229000 B1310 T 392500 118000 0 0 x 388250 Y 118000 VDD 48 49 28 21220 4 9 25 Using Calibre Device Recognition Copyright 2004
310. ssaes 10 7 How Can Calibre Produce Custom Output sssessseeeeeeennnees 10 9 Generating GDSII Output from Calibre sese 10 10 Examples Generating GDSII Output from Calibre susesssse 10 11 How to Compare Two Layout Versions esee 10 12 Dual Database Capabilities oss cose eicetle tat aevo qme nad capessere 10 13 IN EGG ODHDAEL SOT taste ce mute Dru uds e aae eaii eae ong Mp unica EETA 10 14 Example LAYOUT BUNIPA 2 1 nod ecoute pec tto i c ede tales 10 15 Sample LVE Rule qe osos tese Ream ere Caen nny me een Pas past A DR a rd nee 10 16 Lab Information uso een tod e dne bund teat sisse land Sa se aerei tuba us 10 17 Lab Additional Topics cess eo Ser ERE EOS c e ESSERE WEE NNE Feu Du c UO RR ERE 10 18 Exercise 10 1 Improving Antenna Rules vase uite seta enero sad deren tionen eie tunaa 10 19 Exercise 10 2 Create A GDSH Plot Elle et treo uo aeo eR D eta ede es E RR RR ATS 10 30 Exercise 10 3 Run A Layout vs Layout Check eeesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeennennes 10 34 Module 11 Command Line Calibre 1m cett iiir epa ere Ern ee eie eei uela e dio suene cras 11 1 OD ECUV 6S amaaan e babe roto f ceste end do n Ae td 11 1 How to Launch Calibre Interactive from the Command Line 11 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev XV June 2004 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont How to Run Calibre Exclusively from the Command Line
311. ssing net dA x 8 17 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 8 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Tracking Shorts Highlight Next Discrepancy in Netlist Tracking Shorts Highlight Next Discrepancy in Netlist urce netlist FIT Layout Netlist user sallyw calibre us 7 13 10 a1220 T 24 8 12 11 a1220 T 24t 15 52 13 12 9 a1240 54 14 a1220 T 4 7 8 a2311 ST 485t RE stat 3 VDD 7 4 92311 T 48500 vr TS B E Subckts VDD lj 5 8 9 23 a1240 ST a9500 von 10 al220 T 885 d AM in 4 ae a1720 VDD 11 21 3 12 16 a1240 El a1620 6 VDD 22 19 55 a1620 T 9 20 VDD 18 3 a2311 T 1045 traten VDD 54 fj 20 21220 T 136 E a2311 12 VDD 55 19 a2311 T 128 VDD 23 3 12 16 24 a1240 mens VDD 17 25 57 a1220 T 160 E a1220 57 WDD 3 29 a2311 T 1525 j VDD 56 27 26 a1220 T 184 uds VDD 32 12 16 24 a1230 T El labsa WDD 58 28 30 a1220 T 176 VDD 26 fi 31 a1220 T 208 31 VDD 58 12 a2311 T 200 14 VDD 28 33 35 21620 T 32 21230 T 16 22 a2311 T 1 7 26 16 19 2 a1240 7 59 31 a2311 T 15 E laba VDD ij 33 28 29 28 58 IC VDD 16 34 19 2 a1230 T VDD 30 60 32 31220 ST 1 VDD 60 33 16 a2311 T 2 18 VDD 30 35 37 a1620 1 Looks like short happened in X36 in Layout x30 in Source 8 18 Using Calibre Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Copyright 20
312. submicron home page Many useful links Using Calibre with DESIGNrev B 1 June 2004 Appendix B Web Links of Interest B 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Appendix C Query Server Transcripts This appendix contains transcripts from several Query Server Sessions Transcript of Generating a Basic Hcells List Using the Query Server The information below is the transcript of a basic and automatic Hcell file generation using the Query Server All commands enters by the user are to make them easier to find calibre query Calibre v2004 1 5 29 Wed Apr 7 23 26 06 PDT 2004 Litho Libraries v2004 1 5 28 Tue Apr 6 21 24 25 PDT 2004 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2004 All Rights Reserved THIS WORK CONTAINS TRADE SECRET AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION II OR ITS LICENSORS AND IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE TERMS i Mentor Graphics software executing under Sun SPARC Solaris Running on SunOS ding 5 8 Generic 108528 20 sun4u Starting time Fri Apr 16 07 45 09 2004 CALIBRE HDB QUERY SERVER Fri Apr 16 07 45 10 2004 1 This will not generate a complete Hcell file since there is a pseudo cell in the layout Also it will bump into the default threshold and will not add cells that to not contribute that minimum amount of memory savings Using Calibre with DESIGNrev C 1 June 2004 Appendix C Query Server
313. t Data files e DRC Results database ASCII for Calibre RVE IC Station Editor DESIGNrev Binary used for as an intermediary step to translation for third party tools databases when file size in an issue e GDSII used for changing the database using Calibre or as the input to other editors 3 11 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Load Layout How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Load Layout Using Calibre DESIGNrev and Calibre Interactive Launch DESIGNrev MGC HOME bin calibredrv Open the cell in DESIGNrev MENU File Open GDS Open GDS Directory fuser sally wicalibre using_calbrilab2 n File name jlab2 gds Open Files of type GDS gds db sf str stm stmm STR GDS GDS2 GDSII gds2 gdsii Cancel 3 12 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 10 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launch Calibre Interactive How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launch Calibre Interactive Launch Calibre Interactive DRC Calibre Interactive W Calibre DRC on Cell Tools i _j Calibre LVS on Cell Calibre Interactive Scan Layer with RVE 7 Scan Instances with RVE _j Calibre PEX on Cell J Calibre RYE Optio
314. t Part of an Edge Why Does Calibre Only Highlight Part of an Edge Calibre only highlights the part of the edge in violation You specify the edge checking option e Euclidean default e Square e Opposite P ANNA S PAN AN A INT OXIDE POLY 3 OPPOSITE VASA A AN ANA N INT OXIDE POLY lt 3 J N EUCLIDEAN METRIC ININA N AN ANA S INT OXIDE POLY 3 SQUARE 2 17 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation 3 Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 15 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF What are Typical DRC Rules What are Typical DRC Rules Internal e Width e Overlap External Enclosure Extension NOTE The above are dimensional RuleChecks There are other types 2 18 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 2 16 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Width Checks Width Checks Width checks are internal checks on polygons on a single input layer Width checks are measured between interior facing edge pairs on the same polygon 2 19 Using Calibre Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 17 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Interior Facing Edge Checks Interior Facing Edge Checks Internal RuleChe
315. t View Options gt No View Change from the Toolbar 19 Highlight the two layout nets Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 47 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens The layout should look similar to below net 6 T I 30202024 T net 2 E 14 A M js 7 E By Re RR The Source Netlist KEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESE SUBCKT 3122019345 N 7 EP 5 IP 0 FDC 4 L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 X 5375 Y 1400 L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 X 13375 Y 140 L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 Y 51000 L 1 7 n n P p T5e 06 W 2e 05 xX 13125 Y 51000 to Q9 eA fee DORE ESES C eH RBREA b Rd Rd RR RARE 8 48 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens The Layout Netlist FEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEKEEEEEEEEEEEEESE SUBCKT 3122019345 N 8 EP 5 IP 0 FDC 4 M0 8 3 1 1 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 x 5375 Y 14000 M1 4 5 81 n L 1 25e 06 W 1 5e 05 X 13375 Y 14000 M2 4 3 B B p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 X 5125 Y 51000 M3 5 4 p L 1 75e 06 W 2e 05 x 13125 Y 51000 ENDS dkekekek eR x Mx BM G 9B x BG B8 M B BG X8 R AG M xB x x4 B BG BG B B 9B BG M9BG M9BGB8 XAG amp RGM amp 8M amp X The nets involved include the power so much of the layout is highlighted 20 Look at the netlists to narrow down the solution Which of the two layout nets have the fewest occurrences 2 Erase all the highlights Using Calibre with DESIGN
316. t been formally introduced to LVS much of the data will be loaded via runsets This will allow you to concentrate on the main focus of this lab texting List of Exercises Exercise 5 1 Find a Misspelled Layout Text Label Exercise 5 2 Find a Badly Placed Layout Text Label Exercise 5 3 Find Non functional Text Annotations 5 26 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting Exercise 5 1 Find a Misspelled Layout Text Label In this lab you will learn how Calibre deals with a misspelled text label 1 Change to the lab5 directory cd SHOME using calbr lab5 2 List the files in the directory There should be the following 14 files in the directory cell_file lab5a runset lab5b_runset lab5d runset golden rules lab5a source spi lab5b source spi lab5d source spi lab5 rules lab5b gds lab5d gds layer props txt lab5a gds lab5b rules If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Launch DESIGNrev 4 Open lab5a gds 5 Load the layer properties layer props txt 6 Launch Calibre Interactive LVS on cell lab5 7 Use lab5a runset as the runset Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 5 27 June 2004 Module 5 Texting The Calibre Interactive LVS window should look similar to below ESTER Interactive LVS user sallyw calibre using_calbry Hle Transcript Setup Rules 4 Hierarchical Hat Calibre CB Inputs
317. t report hcells response direct Check what is in the query Server s Hcell file Type netlist report hcells The Query Server should respond with a2311 s2311 a1220 s1220 a1240 s1240 a1230 s1230 a1620 s1620 Using another terminal window open thold 5 hcells using any text editor to check the results If you have time you may want to continue experimenting with the Query Server Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 23 When you are finished exit the Query Server Type quit Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 87 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 7 88 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you should be able to Identify simple shorts and opens in a report Find simple shorts and opens in a layout Correct short and open discrepancies in a layout Recognize Power and Ground discrepancies in a report Find the Power and Ground discrepancies in the layout Correct simple Power and Ground discrepancies in the layout Use LVS Isolate Shorts to trace a texted net Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 8 1 June 2004 Module 8 Troubleshooting Shorts and Opens What are Shorts and Opens What are Shorts and Opens Short circuits e Occur when nets that should be isolated are connected e Can lead to a difference between the number of nets layout nets lt source nets
318. t variable TIGHT Re activate the Calibre DRC window Choose Menu Setup gt Environment This will open the Set Rules Environment dialog box Note the environment variable TIGHT is not defined Type yes in the Value field of the dialog box Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 32 33 34 Note that the variable name changes color from red to green indicating that the variable is now defined The dialog box will look like this H Set Rules Environment Rules File Environment Variables Variable Value Variable TIGHT Choose OK to execute the dialog box Choose the Run DRC Menu button Review the DRC summary report and the RVE results display to verify that now only two DRC violations are found minimum metall width and minimum poly extension over oxide Why did the original metall spacing violation disappear 35 Click on the Eraser icon in the RVE window to clear all highlights 36 Close the RVE and summary report windows 37 Follow the procedure outlined above to open the Set Environment dialog box Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 2 45 June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF 38 Unset the TIGHT environment variable by deleting its value The variable name will turn back to red 39 Choose OK to close the dialog box 40 In DESIGNrev click on the Z AI icon to view the entire layout In the next exercise we will write two rules
319. teractive DRC window 12 From DESIGNrev choose Menu Tools gt Calibre Interactive 13 Leave the socket as the default number unless the instructor tells you otherwise 14 In the dialog box select DRC 15 Unselect LVS 16 Check that the cell name is lab1 Calibre Interactive Tools Server W Calibre DRC on Cell fabi _ Calibre LYS on Cell labi _ Calibre PEX on Cell labi Calibre RYE Options Multi layer Highlights Altemate view cell L Run Cancel _ Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 1 33 June 2004 Module 1 Introduction 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 34 Choose Run to execute the dialog box The Calibre Interactive DRC window and Load Runset File dialog box should now be displayed Choose the Browse button EI in the Load Runset File dialog box This opens the Choose Runset dialog box Making sure you are in the lab1 directory select labl runset txt Choose OK to execute the Choose Runset dialog box This will return you to the Load Runset File dialog box with labl runset txt entered in the text box The text should be green indicating a valid existing file Choose OK to execute the Load Runset File dialog box This will make the Calibre Interactive DRC window active and load all pre set information into the dialog box Inputs should be the active Menu Button You now have all the information loaded required to perform a DRC run Choose Ou
320. that the layout designer forgot to draw the main VSS bus The designer may have specific reasons for not connecting the VSS bus so it might be inappropriate for you to modify the layout at this time Is there anything you can do to finish verifying the design without modifying the layout Hint Look back in the lecture or the title of this exercise 12 Close the LVS Report and RVE windows 13 Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active 14 Choose Menu Setup LVS Options Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 39 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 This adds the LVS Options button to the list of Menu buttons Choose the LVS Options Menu button Choose the Connect tab Select the Connect nets named option button Enter VSS in the text box Select the Report connections made by name check box Choose Run LVS What are your results this time View the Extraction Report What information is in the Extraction Report Now that you have quickly verified the correctness of the layout you have time to track down the layout designer and find out what is going on with the VSS bus When you are finished with this lab close all Calibre related windows Including DESIGNrev Calibre Interactive DRC LVS RVE and Summary Report 6 40 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Objectives At the completion of this lecture and lab you s
321. the N in front of the net you will highlight the net If you click on the T after the net you will trace the net highlight trace net net Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 65 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts 10 Try Highlighting the instances and nets from this dialog box Make sure to Sen with a a net versus tracing a net a EXTA TYZAZZZZZAAS MATTER INN CC I e EV 77777777 A Highlighting t the net Tracing the net Notice the difference between highlighting a net and using trace i Trace does not take you below the current hierarchy while Note highlighting will show the net where ever it travels in the hierarchy 11 When you are finished erase all highlights Notice that you need to go back to the RVE window to erase highlights 7 66 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts How many devices connect to net 27 Net 27 in lab7a You can adjust the size of the Net 27 in lab7a dialog box to display i the information you want to see by stretching the corners or Note edges 12 Experiment highlighting the devices Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 7 67 June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts What highlights Notice that the devices also highlight in the netlists during these experiments 13 When you are finished experimenting with the devices erase all highlights What Source Net corresponds to Layout Net 27 Net 27 in l
322. tivity e Explain the difference between o Soft connections o Virtual connections o Hard connections e Explain the difference between o CONNECT o STAMP o SCONNECT e Explain Colon connections Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 1 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity How does Calibre Establish Connectivity How does Calibre Establish Connectivity Like to like always assumes connectivity Single point connections do NOT give connectivity wan Use CONNECT statement in the rules file for different layers CONNECT METALI1 POLY 6 3 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 6 2 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity Review of the CONNECT Statement Hard Connections Review of the CONNECT Statement Hard Connections Rule syntax CONNECT LAYERI LAYER2 CONNECT LAYERI LAYER2 BY LAYER3 vo MENNN Connects eo METALI POLY CONNECT METALI POLY BY CONTACT Example No Connects m 10 NEN CONNECT METALI POLY CONNECT METALI POLY BY CONTACT 6 4 Using Calibre Connectivity Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 6 3 June 2004 Module 6 Connectivity What is Virtual Connect What is Virtual Connect Virtual connect paradigm Layout connectivity extractor forms a single net from two or more disjoint nets by virtue of the fact that the net segments share the same nam
323. to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont DRC Options Calibre Interactive DRC Output Connect Area DRC Includes 3 22 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 19 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont DRC Options a Calibre Interacti Output Connect Area DRC Includes 3 23 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 20 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Define Options Cont DRC Options Output Connect Area DRC m E Includes 3 24 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 21 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launching a Run How to Set Up a Calibre DRC Run Launching a Run Save the runset optional Bie New Runset Open Runset Open Text File Save Runset Save Runset As Choose Run DRC 3 25 Using Calibre Basic DRC Notes 3 22 Save DRC Runset Rules Inputs Run Control Transcript sunm Copyright 2004 Mentor
324. to verify transistor lengths 2 46 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 2 Calibre Rules 101 The SVRF Exercise 2 3 Write Transistor Checks In this exercise you will write two rules to check for minimum transistor lengths in the layout This exercise will demonstrate how derived layers can be used to focus a RuleCheck on a specific subset of layout data For this exercise transistor length is defined as the width of a poly shape that overlaps oxide in the presence of a pplus or nplus shape PMOS transistors are found where poly oxide and pplus coincide NMOS transistors are found where poly oxide and nplus coincide You will complete two rules which are in the rule file Rulecheck min pgate length will highlight all PMOS transistor gates whose length is less than 1 75 microns RuleCheck min ngate length will do the same for all NMOS lengths less than 1 25 microns Both rules will utilize derived layers already defined in the rule file 1 Make the Calibre Interactive DRC window active again 2 Click on the Rules menu button 3 Click on the View button next to the rule file name This will open a text edit window containing a copy of the rule file 4 In the text window choose Menu gt Options gt Line Numbers 5 If necessary re position the text edit window so that the red Edit button located at the bottom of the window is visible 6 Click on the red Edit button The button will turn gree
325. tputs This window displays the information you want Calibre to output from this run and the format you expect Notice that RVE will start and the DRC report will automatically display at the end of a DRC run Choose Transcript This window will display the transcript while Calibre DRC runs Choose Run DRC Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction When the run completes the Transcript window will look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC lab _rules txt CALIBRE DRC H EXECUTIVE MODULE COMPLETED CPU TIME 0 REAL TOTAL RULECHECKS EXECUTED 11 TOTAL RESULTS GENERATED 1 1 DRC RESULTS DATABASE FILE labl drc results ASCII CALIBRE DRC H COMPLETED Mon Feb 24 10 04 41 2003 TOTAL CPU TIME 0 REAL TIME 0 PROCESSOR COUNT 2 SUMMARY REPORT FILE labl drc summary Calibre v9 1 9 3 Fri Dec 13 15 05 27 PST 2002 Litho Libraries v9 1 9 2 Fri Dec 6 12 47 01 PST 2002 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2002 All Rights Reserved THIS WORK CONTAINS TRADE SECRET AND PROPRIETARY INFORMA WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION OR ITS LICENSORS AND IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE TERMS Mentor Graphics software executing under Sun SPARC Solaris Running on Sun0S sundown 5 7 Generic 106541 08 sundu Starting time Mon Feb 24 10 04 41 2003 Graphical User Interface startup Complete Notice the top set of lines They tell you that the DRC run
326. u want RVE the start as soon as the DRC run completes You also want the DRC Summary Report to appear Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC in a text editor when DRC completes The dialog box should look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC 27 Choose the Transcript Menu Button This displays the Transcript during the DRC run From here you can quickly note any problems that may occur during the run 28 Choose Run DRC to start the run Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 49 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC When the run completes RVE launches the DRC Summary Report displays and the Transcript Window should look similar to below Calibre Interactive DRC You will analyze the results in the next exercise 3 50 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Exercise 3 2 Check the Results In this exercise you will review the error messages found in the transcript summary report and RVE You will also highlight the errors in the layout 1 Look at the transcript window and answer the following questions How many rules were checked How many discrepancies results were found 2 Scan the Summary Report and answer the following questions Hint This information is towards the bottom of the report Which rules have discrepancies How many of these errors occurred multiple times due to being in a cell that has several instances in the layout Wh
327. une 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Other Uses for the Query Server Other Uses for the Query Server Find what devices are connected to a given net Find what nets are connected to a given device Find bad devices Find deviceless cells Find pseudo cells 9 9 9 9 Lookin the Calibre Verification User s Manual for more functions 7 44 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 7 44 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Lab Information Lab Information In this lab session you will Run Calibre LVS View the Transcript View the LVS Report Run Calibre LVS in hierarchical mode using automatic cell correspondence Use Calibre RVE to view the LVS H Results Database Create an Hcell Correspondence File and use it with Calibre LVS H Use the Calibre RVE SPICE Netlist Browser to cross probe between netlists Experiment with the Query Server A a c 7 45 Using Calibre Basic LVS Concepts Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 7 45 Module 7 Basic LVS Concepts Lab Basic LVS Concepts In the past two labs you have been working with LVS without a formal introduction to the interface or reports In this lab you will learn how to use the Calibre Interactive LVS interface and a formal introduction on how to read the reports You w
328. ure but you will be given enough information to perform the necessary tasks You will obtain a deeper understanding of these concepts in later lectures and labs In this first lab all procedural steps contain full step by step instructions and information As you gain practice in performing common procedures the labs will provide less instruction on those procedures The labs will inform you when they will no longer give detailed step by step instructions for a procedure and they will reference the most recent lab step that provided those instructions Lab Conventions In order to make labs as simple and clear as possible the instructions use the following conventions e You usually just click mouse buttons unless specifically told to do otherwise o LMB left mouse button default o RMB right mouse button o MMB middle mouse button 1 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 1 Introduction e Numbered or lettered steps have you perform some action Paragraphs without numbers only provide supplemental information or ask questions for you to think about e Numbered steps are a base action If there are lettered steps below a number these lettered steps provide all the details of how to perform the numbered step Therefore if you already know how to do the numbered step you may safely skip the lettered steps unless you are specifically told otherwise It would be a good idea to at least skim the lettered ste
329. ws 4 22 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics 14 Spend some time experimenting with the rules selection feature 15 When you are done experimenting make sure all rules are selected close the Select Rules window and close any open RVE or Summary report windows you may have opened during your experiments Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 4 23 June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics Exercise 4 3 Run DRC Checking on a Select Area In this exercise you will run the DRC checks on just a selected area in the layout 1 Make the Calibre Interactive DRC window active 2 Display the Inputs 3 Select the Check Area option button What happens You need to define the area you wish to check 4 Choose the button from the end of the Check Area text box This gives you an information box telling you that it is waiting for input Ignore this message for now Waiting for layout 1 Waiting for DRC area coordinates from layout viewer Cancel 5 Make the Layout Viewer window active 6 Hold down the LMB and draw a rectangle around the desired area Any area in the layout will do for this step 7 Release the LMB 4 24 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 4 Advanced DRC Topics What happened in the Calibre Interactive window 8 Run DRC What kind of results do you get 9 Close the DRC Summary Report and RVE windows 10 Experiment several times wit
330. xt from the object selection list in the upper right of the DESIGNrev window tex Notch Y A ref J poly edge i vrix W text Layers lt lt lt 333 482 277 796 gt Layers 1240 EE pwell oxide Click on the yellow highlight resulting from the Find Text operation Select Move from the Toolbar Move the text so it is centered in its expected net Unselect everything Type u Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 5 Texting 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Choose Find in the Find Text dialog box again This checks that the text moved as expected Close all RVE windows including the netlist windows and RVE itself Return to the Calibre Interactive window Choose the Inputs menu button Change the Layout File from lab5b gds to lab5b_fixed gds Select the Import layout database from layout viewer option By making these two changes you are loading your changes directly from DESIGNrev without saving the layout first You are also creating a new GDSII so you are not overwriting your existing file Run LVS again If you are asked to save the file choose Yes Did that fix the problem If that did not fix the problem try moving the text again until you are sure it is connected to the net Close RVE and all related window Return to DESIGNrev Delete the text Make the Calibre Interactive LVS window active
331. y this time you will be working directly from the command line without any type of GUI interface List of Exercises Exercise 11 1 Command Line DRC Run Exercise 11 2 Command Line LVS Run Exercise 11 3 Command Line to Calibre Interactive Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 11 27 June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre Exercise 11 1 Command Line DRC Run In this lab you will run Calibre DRC directly from the command line 1 Change to the lab11 directory cd SHOME using calbr 1labl1 2 List the files in the directory You should see the five files e golden rules e labll rule results e labll rules e lablla gds e lablla source spi If any of these files are missing please double check that you are in the correct directory and then notify your instructor 3 Using your favorite ASCII text editor open the lab11 rules file for edits What is currently in the file This is the type of starting rule file that you have used for all the other labs In this exercise you need to add manually all the additional information that Calibre Interactive has been adding automatically 11 28 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 11 Command Line Calibre What are the three Specification Statements that Calibre requires for all runs 4 Write each rule Specification Statement next for the descriptions below The layout data format is GDSII The layout filename is lab11a gds The primary cell in the layout is lab
332. ygon is too narrow Example Rule min poly width internal poly 1 25 opposite 3 7 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 5 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Example Extension Spacing Problem Example Extension Spacing Problem Polygon extension is too small Example Rule min ext oxide poly enclosure oxide poly lt 1 25 3 8 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 6 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Example Overlap of Polygons on Different Layers Example Overlap of Polygons on Different Layers Not enough overlap Example Rule poly enclose cont enclosure contact poly lt 1 0 opposite 3 9 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes Using Calibre with DESIGNrev 3 7 June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC What Files Does a DRC Run Require What Files Does a DRC Run Require Layout file Any of these formats are acceptable e ASCII e GDSII e CIF e Oasis RulesFile e ASCII e SVRF format 3 10 Using Calibre Basic DRC Copyright 2004 Mentor Graphics Corporation Notes 3 8 Using Calibre with DESIGNrev June 2004 Module 3 Basic DRC Calibre Output Files Calibre Output Files DRC summary report in ASCII forma

Notes

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents